ABB-EIB Manual Literature

Distribution Boards& Consumer Units

Enclosures for system pro M compact®

1SKC802027C0201

General

Distribution Boards

Mini Center compact

Mounting kits for compact accessories

Consumer Units

Styler

Dimensional details

Contents

1SKC802027C0201

2/4

5/7

8

9

10

1

Distribution Boards& Consumer Units

2

Distribution BoardsGeneral

1SKC802027C0201

Our mission is to meet customer’s expectations by providingsatisfaction through cost, quality, service, delivery and continuousimprovement.ABB Mini Center Compact distribution boards are the basis fordevelopment and growth in meeting all the demands for asuccessful future in residential, commercial, and infrastructuresegments.The wide range of distribution boards enables each customerto select an individual and economical configuration accordingto his requirements and satisfaction.ABB Mini Center Compact distribution boards have been designedusing the latest available technology and comply with the followingstandards: IEC 439-3 and BS EN 60439-3

Mini Center Compact• Sheet steel enclosures Type A and Type B• Flush and surface mounting• Indoor use• Top and bottom feed• Various copper connection kits for all incoming options• Aluminum support rail for easy placing of outgoing MCB• Extension boxes: 200 and 400 mm high• Distribution boards, together with modular ABB system pro M Compact protection

devices and Modular Din Rail Components, can be used for many applications inelectrical building installations.

• Solutions with tailor made distribution boards to meet customer requirements other thanstandards ones.

• More than 200 combinations.

Features

Reliable and safeMini Center Compact is a reliable range of distribution boardsallowing maximum flexibility, offering wide choice of incomers:Switch Disconnector, MCCB, MCB, RCCB, RCD or direct cableconnection.

The busbar design eliminates risk of the hot spots. Busbar andterminals are shrouded for additional safety protection.

The pan assembly is designed to allow dismounting andmounting of MCB’s without obstructing the other MCB’s.

The front cover mounting screws are located behind the doorfor added personal security.It has the advantage of either factory fitted incoming devicesor the choice of a wide range of incoming kits that can beeasily fitted by the installer himself.

Easy to selectClear detailed description of each size and easy to select withthe ordering codes.

Easy to installBox with four studs and adjustable nuts for easy fit / easyremoval of the pan assembly.

Easy to useGenerous wiring space. Easy fit of incomer devices, aluminumprofile with plastic clip for self aligning feature of outgoingMCBs. Easy to remove or change gland plates and fix top /bottom extension boxes.

Type Test Certification

31SKC802027C0201

Distribution boardsMain incoming options

Main Isolator,MCB + RCCB

Main RCCB

Main MCB

Main MCCB up to 160AT1, E, B, C & N

Main MCCB up to 250AT3N

Direct Connection

Combination Busbar+ DIN Rail

CombinationSplit type busbar + DIN Rail

Multi Row

Consumer UnitsGeneral

41SKC802027C0201

Styler Consumer Units, a design perfectly suited toinstallation in domestic and commercial applications, easyto install and high reliability.

Features

Available in 7, 10, 15 and 20 modules, enabling the installerto design a consumer unit to individual specification.

Ample knock-outs on top, bottom, and rear for cables andconduits entries.

Neutral and Earth terminal bars are provided as standard.

The front steel cover is fitted with a transparent flap for visualinspection.The front cover mounting screws are located behind thetransparent flap for added personal security.

Concise circuit identification labels.

Styler Consumer units, together with modular ABB systempro M Compact protection devices and Modular Din RailComponents, can be used in domestic and commercialapplications.

51SKC802027C0201

TP + N busbar type distribution boardsIncomer Type: Switch Isolator up to 125A Type E200 I series

498 x 400 x 117559 x 400 x 117648 x 400 x 117701 x 400 x 117752 x 400 x 117920 x 400 x 1171027 x 400 x 1171134 x 400 x 117

Weightkg

Ways1P 3P

Ordering detailsType Code Type No.

GDMS312 S100FCGDMS318 S100FCGDMS324 S100FCGDMS330 S100FCGDMS336 S100FCGDMS348 S100FCGDMS360 S100FCGDMS372 S100FC

2CVB 101 091 M00012CVB 201 091 M00012CVB 301 091 M00012CVB 401 091 M00012CVB 501 091 M00012CVB 601 091 M00012CVB 701 091 M00012CVB 801 091 M0001

79111315171921

1218243036486072

4681012162024

DimensionsH x W x D mm

StandardBusbar RatingBusbar TypeVoltage RatingFault levelNo. of Ways

Degree of ProtectionEnclosure MaterialSteel Thickness.

Knock outs - BodyGland PlatesEnclosure FinishPaint Film ThicknessIncoming OptionsTerminals Capacity

Neutral Terminals BarEarth Terminals Bar

: EC 439-3 & BS 60439-3: 200/250A: Fully shrouded dual solid tin plated copper: 220-440VAC 50/60 H: 35 kA: 12, 18,24,30,36,48,60,72 SPN: 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24 TPN: IP 41: Galvanized steel sheet: Box for 12-72 SPN 4-24 TPN 1 mmPan assembly 12-72 SPN 4-24 TPN 1.5 mm

: Top & bottom: Removable gland plates top and bottom: Gray, RAL 7035. Polyester epoxy powder paint. Other colours on request: 60 - 80 microns: Switch-Isolator, MCB, MCCB, RCCB, Direct Connection: Switch-Isolator, Rotary Type Switches: 50 mm2

MCB Frame size 63A: 25 mm2


MCCB Frame size 160A: 70 mm2 & 95 mm2

MCCB Frame size 250A: 185 mmRCCB Frame size 63A: 25 mmRCCB Frame size 100A: 50 mmDirect cable connection with cable lugs: 150 mm2

: 16 mm2 terminals for outgoing cables, and 2 x 50 mm2 for incoming cable: 16 mm2 terminals for outgoing cables, and 2 x 50 mm2 for incoming cable

TP + N busbar type distribution boardsIncomer Type: MCB up to 100A Type S280C


Weightkg

Ways1P 3P


GDMS312 E100FCGDMS318 E100FCGDMS324 E100FCGDMS330 E100FCGDMS336 E100FCGDMS348 E100FCGDMS360 E100FCGDMS372 E100FC


79111315171921

1218243036486072

4681012162024


Distribution BoardsMini Center compactTechnical Data / Ordering details

61SKC802027C0201

TP + N busbar type distribution boardsIncomer Type: MCCB up to 160A Type Tmax T1


Weightkg

Ways1P 3P


GDMS312 C160FCGDMS318 C160FCGDMS324 C160FCGDMS330 C160FCGDMS336 C160FCGDMS348 C160FCGDMS360 C160FCGDMS372 C160FC


79111315171921

1218243036486072

4681012162024


TP + N busbar type distribution boardsIncomer Type: MCCB up to 250A Type Tmax T3


Weightkg

Ways1P 3P


GDMS312 M250FCGDMS318 M250FCGDMS324 M250FCGDMS330 M250FCGDMS336 M250FCGDMS348 M250FCGDMS360 M250FCGDMS372 M250FC


79111315171921

1218243036486072

4681012162024


TP + N busbar type distribution boardsIncomer Type: RCCB up to 100A Type F200


Weightkg

Ways1P 3P


GDMS312 R63FCGDMS318 R63FCGDMS324 R63FCGDMS330 R63FCGDMS336 R63FCGDMS348 R63FCGDMS360 R63FCGDMS372 R63FC


79111315171921

1218243036486072

4681012162024


TP + N busbar type distribution boardsIncomer Type: Direct connection for cable lugs up to 150 mm2


Weightkg

Ways1P 3P


GDMS312 D200FCGDMS318 D200FCGDMS324 D200FCGDMS330 D200FCGDMS336 D200FCGDMS348 D200FCGDMS360 D200FCGDMS372 D200FC


79111315171921

1218243036486072

4681012162024


Distribution BoardsMini Center compactOrdering details (continued)

71SKC802027C0201

TP + N busbar type distribution boardsIncomer Type: Combination busbar and Din Rail


Weightkg

Ways1P 3P


GDMS312 MXFCGDMS318 MXFCGDMS324 MXFCGDMS330 MXFCGDMS336 MXFCGDMS348 MXFCGDMS360 MXFCGDMS372 MXFC


79111315171921

1218243036486072

4681012162024


TP + N busbar type distribution boardsIncomer Type: Isolator, MCB + RCCB

920 x 400 x 117920 x 400 x 117920 x 400 x 1171027 x 400 x 1171027 x 400 x 117

Weightkg

Ways1P 3P


GDMS344 ER100FCGDMS364 ER100FCGDMS366 ER100FCGDMS384 ER100FCGDMS386 ER100FC

2CVB 908 091 M00012CVB 909 091 M00012CVB 910 091 M00012CVB 911 091 M00012CVB 912 091 M0001

1113151719

12+1218+1218+1824+1224+18

4+46+46+68+48+6


TP + N busbar type distribution boardsIncomer Type: Combination Split Busbar and DIN Rail

701 x 400 x 117752 x 400 x 117920 x 400 x 117920 x 400 x 117920 x 400 x 117

Weightkg

Ways1P 3P


GDMS344 SD100FCGDMS364 SD100FCGDMS366 SD100FCGDMS384 SD100FCGDMS386 SD100FC

2CVB 913 091 P00012CVB 914 091 P00012CVB 915 091 P00012CVB 916 091 P00012CVB 917 091 P0001

1113151719

12+1218+1218+1824+1224+18

4+46+46+68+48+6


Distribution BoardsMini Center compactOrdering details (continued)

Extension Boxes

200 x 400 x 117400 x 400 x 117200 x 400 x 117

Weightkg

Description Ordering detailsType Code Type No.

GDMS200 EXBEFCGDMS400 EXBEFCGDMS200 EXBFFC

2CVA 002 101 R10012CVA 002 102 R10012CVA 002 103 R1001

353

Cable box height 200Cable box height 400Box with steel flap &one Din Rail


Multi row type distribution boards 16 modules per row(distance between rows 150 mm)

498 x 400 x 117648 x 400 x 117752 x 400 x 117920 x 400 x 117

Weightkg

No. ofRows


GDMS332 RXGDMS348 RXGDMS364 RXGDMS380 RX

2CVA 250 001 P00012CVA 360 001 P00012CVA 470 001 P00012CVA 580 001 P0001

10121416

2345


81SKC802027C0201

Distribution boardsMounting kitsOrdering details

Isolator, MCB Shroud

Weightkg


SA5827 059PA 2CVN 001 101 R1001 0.15Shroud for 3 pole Isolator or MCB

RCCB Incoming Shroud

Weightkg


SA5827 095PA 2CVN 001 102 R1001 0.12Shroud for 4 pole RCCB

MCCB Tmax T1 Incoming Shroud

Weightkg


SA5827 090 2CVN 001 103 R1001 0.13Shroud for 3 pole MCCB Tmax Type T1

MCCB Tmax T3 Incoming Shroud

Weightkg


SA5827 091 2CVN 001 104 R1001 0.14Shroud for 3 pole MCCB Tmax Type T3

MCCB Tmax T1 Incoming Copper Connections

Weightkg


SA5281 008PG 2CVN 001 105 R1001 0.21Copper connections for 3 pole MCCB Tmax Type T1

MCCB Tmax T3 Incoming Copper Connections

Weightkg


SA5281 026PG 2CVN 001 106 R1001 0.23Copper connections for 3 pole MCCB Tmax Type T3

Neutral or earth bar with terminal 16 mm2

Weightkg


NB-24A

NB-30A

2CVN 001 107 R1001

2CVN 001 108 R1001

0.18

0.23

Neutral or Earth bar suitable for 12, 18, 30, 36 way 1 poleor 4, 6, 10, 12 way 3 pole

Neutral or Earth bar suitable for 24, 48 way 1 poleor 8, 16 way 3 pole

91SKC802027C0201

Consumer UnitsStylerTechnical Data / Ordering details

StandardMaximum LoadMaximum Voltage RangeDegree of ProtectionEnclosure Material

Steel Thickness.Knock outs - BodyEnclosure FinishPaint Film ThicknessPlastic Film & FlapIncoming OptionsTerminals Capacity

Neutral Terminals BarEarth Terminals Bar

: EC 439-3 & BS 60439-3: 100A: 220-440VAC 50/60 H: 7, 10, 16 and 20 TPN: IP 40: Aluzinc steel sheet: Optimum corrosion resistance and galvanicprotection on the steel

: Box and cover 1 mm: Top, bottom and rear: Gray, RAL 7035. Polyester epoxy powder paint. Other colours on request: 60 - 80 microns

: Switch-Isolator, MCB, and RCCB: Switch-Isolator, Rotary Type Switches: 50 mm2


RCCB Frame size 63A: 25 mm2

RCCB Frame size 100A: 50 mm2

: 16 mm2

: 16 mm2

Plastic flap

250 x 203 x 90250 x 257 x 90250 x 362 x 90250 x 434 x 90

Weightkg

Modules Ordering detailsType Code Type No.

GCMC 107PLFCGCMC 110PLFCGCMC 116PLFCGCMC 120PLFC


2345

7101620


Steel flap

250 x 203 x 90250 x 257 x 90250 x 362 x 90250 x 434 x 90

Weightkg

Modules Ordering detailsType Code Type No.

GCMC 107SLSCGCMC 110SLSCGCMC 116SLSCGCMC 120SLSC


2345

7101620


101SKC802027C0201

Distribution BoardsMini Center compactDimensional details

5185796687217729401047114551857966872177294010471145940940104710471047721772940940940

B (mm)Type Code D (mm)

GDMS312 xxxxFCGDMS318 xxxxFCGDMS324 xxxxFCGDMS330 xxxxFCGDMS336 xxxxFCGDMS348 xxxxFCGDMS360 xxxxFCGDMS372 xxxxFCGDMS312 MXFCGDMS318 MXFCGDMS324 MXFCGDMS330 MXFCGDMS336 MXFCGDMS348 MXFCGDMS360 MXFCGDMS372 MXFCGDMS344 ER100FCGDMS364 ER100FCGDMS366 ER100FCGDMS384 ER100FCGDMS386 ER100FCGDMS344 SD100FCGDMS364 SD100FCGDMS366 SD100FCGDMS384 SD100FCGDMS386 SD100FC

4985596487017529201027113449855964870175292010271134920920102710271027701752920920920

K (mm)

37243352257562679490110083724335225756267949011008794794901901901575626794794794

400296

400

518668772940


GDMS332 RXGDMS348 RXGDMS364 RXGDMS380 RX

498648752920

K (mm)

372522626794

420296

400

420296

400

210410210


GDMS200 EXBEFCGDMS400 EXBEFCGDMS200 EXBFFC

200400200

K (mm)

7427474

TP + N busbar type distribution boards

Extension Boxes

Multi row type distribution boards 16 modules per row

111SKC802027C0201

Consumer UnitsStylerDimensional details

Plastic flap

Steel flap

227281386458

A (mm)Type Code C (mm)

GCMC 107PLFCGCMC 110PLFCGCMC 116PLFCGCMC 120PLFC

203257362434

J (mm)

133183290362

274 250 146

274 250 146 227281386458

A (mm)Type Code C (mm)

GCMC 107SLSCGCMC 110SLSCGCMC 116SLSCGCMC 120SLSC

203257362434

J (mm)

133183290362

121SKC802027C0201

Notes

As part of its on-going product improvement, ABB reservesthe right to modify the characteristics or the products describedin this document. The information given is not-contractual.For further details please contact the ABB company marketingthese products in your country. P

ublic

atio

nN

o:1S

KC

8020

27C

0201

Prin

ted

in E

gypt

(D

ec. 2

007)

ein

vis

ual c

omm

unic

atio

n

ABB Electrical Industries Co. Ltd.

RiyadhP.O. Box 251 Riyadh 11383, KSATel.: + 966 (1) 265 3030Fax: + 966 (1) 265 1211

www.abb.com.sa

Al-KhobarP.O. Box 2873 Al-Khobar 31952, KSATel.: + 966 (3) 882 9394Fax: + 966 (3) 882 4603

JeddahP.O. Box 12539 jeddah 21483, KSATel.: + 966 (2) 669 6909Fax: + 966 (2) 669 4310

ABB i-bus® KNXApplikationshandbuch Jalousiesteuerung

ABB i-bus® KNXApplication Manual Shutter Control

This manual describes the function of the Lighting systems. Subject to changes and errors excepted.

Limitation of liability:

Despite checking that the contents of this document match the hardware and software, deviations cannot be completely excluded. We therefore cannot accept any liability for this. Any necessary corrections will be inserted in new versions of the manual.Please inform us of any suggested improvements.E-mail: [email protected]

Sample

Note

Tip

Advantage

Disadvantage

Description of the symbols:

1

Preface/General ...................................................................................................................... 2

1. Introduction

1.1. Selection of the required circuit and control functions .................................................. 5

2. Circuit design

2.1. Switching from one or more positions .............................................................................. 6

2.1.1. KNX bus push buttons.................................................................................................. 6

2.1.2. Conventional push buttons with binary input ................................................................ 7

2.1.3. Drive control ................................................................................................................ 8

2.1.4. Bus voltage failure, bus voltage recovery, programming ............................................... 14

2.2. Group and central circuits .................................................................................................. 16

2.2.1. Sending two group addresses ...................................................................................... 17

2.2.2. Central command and status feedback ........................................................................ 18

3. Control functions

3.1. Timer control ........................................................................................................................ 19

3.1.1. Devices for implementation of timer functions ............................................................. 19

3.1.2. Timer control combined with conditions ....................................................................... 20

3.2. Movement to positions ........................................................................................................ 24

3.2.1. Automatic functions ..................................................................................................... 24

3.2.2. Realisation with standard drives .................................................................................. 25

3.3. Sensor-dependent control .................................................................................................. 28

3.3.1. Weather-dependent control.......................................................................................... 28

3.3.2. Temperature dependent control ................................................................................... 33

Appendix Checklist ............................................................................................................................... 39

Table of content

2

Preface/General

General

ABB i-bus® systems offer an attractive solution which fulfi ls the highest standards in residential,

commercial and public buildings. Quality of living, comfort and safety can be easily combined

with cost-effectiveness and environmental awareness using ABB i-bus® systems.

The ABB i-bus® products cover the entire range of applications in buildings: from illumination

and shutter control to heating, ventilation, energy management, security and surveillance.

These demands are can be realised cost-effectively with minimal planning and installation effort

using the ABB i-bus®. Furthermore, the fl exible usage of rooms and the continuous adaptation

to changing requirements are simple to realise.

Important for the realisation of the elevated demands of building users is however, professional

and detailed planning. This application manual – from practical application for practical usage –

is intended to assist simpler planning and implementation of a project.

Planning of a project

One of the main considerations when planning a building control with the ABB i-bus®

is whether the actuators for the circuits are installed on a centralised or distributed basis.

Central installation

In smaller properties, houses or apartments, all wiring to consumers can be brought to

a central point.

Distributed installation

In a distributed installation the devices are installed in the vicinity of the load.

A central installation is more transparent, fewer KNX components are required and the cost per channel

is lower.

A central installation requires more wiring effort and expense.

A distributed installation requires less wiring effort on the load end.

A distributed installation signifi cantly increases the cost per channel. The overall system can quickly lose

transparency and devices may possibly be diffi cult to access. As the number of KNX devices increases

with a distributed installation, the programming effort also increases. Additional power supplies and

couplers may be necessary, which will also increase costs.

3

Preface/General

Conclusion

During planning, it is increasingly signifi cant to consider the constructive features of a building.

In practical use, a combination of central and distributed installation has proven to be useful.

Distributed installation is not possible, for example, in a dwelling due to space considerations.

For larger buildings, a central installation can mean a room, a hall or a fl oor, which still complies

with a distributed installation in terms of the overall concept.

A further solution for a distributed, room-oriented application is the Room Controller RC/A 8.1

and Room Master RM/S x.1 from ABB.

For further information refer to the Room Controller and Room Master product manual.

ABB i-bus® application manual shading/windows/skylights/awnings

All the possible circuit confi gurations are explained after a brief introduction in this application

manual, e.g. operation from one or more points. The many application examples are comple-

mented by information, tips, benefi ts and disadvantages which offer a quick and simple insight

into the advantages of the different control functions, e.g. timer control, sensor-dependent

control.

The selection possibilities of the individual control functions and their combination possibilities

are very comprehensive. The checklist from ABB has proven to be very useful for simplifi cation

of the engineering involved.

A checklist template can be found in the Appendix.

4

1. Introduction

The control of motor drives is one of the main applications of the ABB i-bus®.

The following applications can be operated with motor drives:

– Shutters with and without louvres, e.g. in commercial buildings such as offi ces,

hospitals, schools

– Roller blinds, e.g. like in dwellings

– Electrically operated windows

– Skylights, e.g. in factory halls

– Electrically operated curtains

– Doors, e.g. garage doors

– Awnings

– Partitions

– Ventilation fl aps

Up to now, only on-site operation of drives was possible in most cases. This makes the use

of additional functions such as wind monitoring devices or central/group controls more diffi cult.

The implementation of such functions can only be undertaken with a lot of effort and was

therefore expensive as a result. Implementation is not a problem with the ABB i-bus®.

There is complete fl exibility for the following :

– On-site control

– Group/central operation

– UP/DOWN functions

– STOP functions

– Adjustment of louvres

– Move to position

– Safety monitoring, e.g. with weather sensors

– Timer control, e.g. with absence of the occupants

– Inhibiting/interlocking a drive

– Automatic functions

Automatic shading should be implemented in a school so that lessons are not interrupted.

However, darkening of each individual classroom must still be possible when required, e.g. when showing

a fi lm or beamer presentation.

Important preliminary considerations of such a project have proven useful for optimum planning

of a project. This includes selection of the circuit and control functions.

Introduction

5

1.1. Selection of the required circuit and control functions

The shutter and roller blind control with ABB i-bus® is characterised by a high level of fl exibility.

This includes a large range of individual control functions and their combination possibilities.

The following functions are available:

Circuit design

– Switching from one or more positions

– Central and group switching

Control functions

– Timer control

– Movement to positions

– Sensor-dependent control

• Weather

• Temperature

Introduction

6

Circuit design

2. Circuit design

To plan a useful circuit design, the different circuit confi gurations must be reviewed in the

preliminary considerations and then selected appropriately:

– Switching of one or more positions

– Central and group switching

2.1. Switching of one or more positions

Even with the use of intelligent electrical installation systems such as ABB i-bus®, the basic

functions for every application with shutter actuators incorporate local operation of one or

more drives using push buttons. These are generally tried-and-tested and proven in practice.

2.1.1. KNX bus push buttons

With this solution, the functions are implemented with both sides of the KNX push button,

i.e. one end is used for up and the other is used for down. Both ends enable the stop function

and the louvre adjustment.

The shutters in a conference room should be moved as required. One or more drives are operated using

a local button.

The following principle has proven itself in practice:

– Long button push: the shutter moves upward, a logical 0 is sent, or downwards and a logical 1 is sent

(1 bit command).

– Short button push: the shutter stops (1 bit command).

– Repeated short button push after the stop command: the shutter moves in steps or the louvers are

adjusted.

The operating principle can be implemented with KNX bus push buttons or with conventional push

buttons in conjunction with a binary input.

7

Circuit design

2.1.2 Conventional push buttons with binary input

If a Binary Input is used, e.g. US/U x.x or BE/S x.x, it is possible to operate with just a single

input and one push button. Here an alternate long button push operates the UP/DOWN func-

tion and a short button push the STOP function or louvre adjustment.

Fig. 1: Parameters for Binary Input as a shutter sensor

Only one channel and push button are required. The parameterisation offers a high level of fl exibility.

You can also connect (rotary) switches.

If the shutter is in the middle position, it is not clear beforehand the direction which the shutter will move

after a long button push. This type of operation is unconventional for shutters.

– Sending a 1 bit telegram with the value 0 for UP, or the value 1 for DOWN is defi ned in the KNX and

should be observed with central commands.

– The assignment of the functions for short and long operation as described above has proven useful

in practice. The functions can be swapped as both commands are 1 bit telegrams.

– The functions behind the short and long operation can be assigned on two different push buttons.

This is not implemented for economy reasons with room buttons (double the number of push buttons),

but is frequently used in control panels or LCD displays.

– The group addresses of these functions, move UP/DOWN, STOP or louvre adjustment are different!

8

Circuit design

2.1.3. Drive control

The drives are controlled by a changeover contact in the shutter actuator. The corresponding

winding in the drive is controlled to comply with the direction of motion. It is not possible to

activate both drive windings simultaneously. This would cause the destruction of the drive.

Fig. 2: Connection schematic ABB Shutter Actuator JA/S 4.230.1

There are conventional actuators which can be programmed as a Switch Actuator or a Shutter

Actuator. When used as a shutter output, two relays are used which are mutually exclusive using

software. A mechanical interlock is not available which in the most unfavourable cases,

e.g. software problems, can cause damage to the motor.

In the parameters of the Shutter Actuators, e.g. MDRC devices JA/S x.x or modules of the

Room Controller JA/M 2.x.1, it is still possible to make every channel a switch channel.

Here, only one end of the changeover contact is used, see Fig. 3. The number of parameters is

reduced using software so that it fi ts classical switching functions, e.g. ventilation fl aps or lights.

L

PE

NLN

MMMM

JA/S 4.230.1

A CB D

L Lμμ

9

Circuit design

The following circuit shows the switch actuator function using the ventilation fl ap connection

as an example:

Fig. 3: Connection schematic ABB Shutter Actuator JA/S 4.230.1 with switch actuator/ventilation fl ap function

The shutter actuators have 6 A relays installed which are practically always suffi cient for the

drives which are to be connected.

For further information see: Parallel connection of several drives, Cap. 2.1.3.4.

L1L2

PE

N2N

MMMM

JA/S 4.230.1

A CB D

L L

Unlike switch actuators and lamps, several loads (drives) will not be connected in parallel to the channels

of the shutter actuators. If a drive was still operating and the other was already in its end position and

switched off via an end limit switch, reverse voltage will occur on the drive and could damage it.

If this type of installation is still demanded, operation with isolating relays is required.

10

Circuit design

2.1.3.1. DC drives

In addition to 230 V AC drives, there are also DC drives. Their area of application is with

electrically operated windows and internal blinds.

On DC drives, the direction of operation is reversed by changing the polarity on the drive.

In principle, the respective actuators function exactly as with the AC drives, see Fig. 4.

The application software is also the same.

The DC supply is applied externally. The shutter actuator permits a voltage between

12 and 48 V.

Fig. 4: Connection schematic ABB Shutter Actuator JA/S 4.24.1 with DC motors

2.1.3.2. Reversal time or Pause on change in direction

An important parameter in the shutter actuators is the so-called reversal time. It defi nes how

long the drive remains stationary when a command is issued to move in the other direction

while the drive is operational.

–+

M–M– M– M–

JA/S 4.24.1

A CB D

This time is important for the protection of the motor or the connected mechanical components.

The default value is 500 ms and should be corrected if necessary after consulting the manufacturer

of the drive.

11

Circuit design

2.1.3.3. End limit stop

Shutter drives feature an end limit stop in the housing. If the drive reaches the end position

at the top or bottom and with closed or opened windows, the drive must be stopped. The drive

is disconnected from the voltage supply. This is achieved using end limit switches. There are

two possibilities for an end limit stop:

– Mechanical end limit switches

– End limit stop via overcurrent or undercurrent

Mechanical end limit switches

The drive operates the shutter until the respective end limit position is reached. The circuit

is interrupted here.

End limit stop via overcurrent or undercurrent

With an end limit stop initiated by overcurrent or undercurrent, the drive moves to the

respective end position and is mechanically blocked. The resulting increase (drive in upper

end position) or reduction in current (drive in lower end position) is detected and switch off

is initiated.

The motor also switches off when an obstacle is detected.

The drive and the shutters to be controlled must be matched to one another, i.e. correctly confi gured.

Otherwise the drive will not operate correctly, i.e. the shutter may stop in the middle or too late in the end

position. This can damage the shutter.

To guarantee an exact position feedback of the shutters, (also refer to chapter 3.2 Positioning) the travel

time of the shutter must be entered for the Shutter Actuator in the application. After the travel time has

elapsed, the changeover contact is switched to a no-voltage state. Using a further parameter, the time

for shut down can be selected to be longer than the real run time, ensuring the drive reaches the end

positions even under unfavourable conditions. End limit position switch off is mandatory. The isolation

of the relay in the Shutter Actuator is only an additional protective measure.

12

Circuit design

2.1.3.4. Parallel connection of several drives

Normally only one drive is connected per channel, otherwise reverse voltages may occur with

the parallel connection of several drives to a channel.

Background:

Fig. 5: Source: Berker

Both drives are controlled in the same direction of operation when the switch is actuated.

When drive 1 has reached the end position, end position switch E2 opens. Drive 2 is still in

operation and puts drive 1 back into operation moving in the opposite direction via a reverse

voltage on its capacitor. Thus E2 is closed again after a short time. As a result, drive 1 again

operates in the original direction of motion until contact E2 is reopened. These switching

processes can be recognised by oscillation of the shutter/blinds.

As the reverse voltage can be up to 1000 V and many changes of direction occur over a short

time, end position switch E2 is overloaded. This irrevocably leads to welding of the contacts.

Accordingly the end limit stop is put out of operation in this direction of movement.

The result: destruction of the motor and/or the shutter/blind.

Should parallel installation be required however, it can be implemented in two ways:

– Use of isolating relays

– Shutter Actuator JA/S 2.230.1

Use of isolating relays

Isolating relays are used between the motors and the changeover contacts of the Shutter

Actuator and electrically isolate the motors from one another, so that there are no problems

caused by reverse voltages.

There is increased installation and wiring effort which leads to higher costs.

13

Circuit design

Shutter Actuator JA/S 2.230.1

One exception is the use of the Shutter Actuator JA/S 2.230.1. It allows for the connection

of two drives to a single channel. These are of course internally isolated by an isolating relay.

Fig. 6

L

PE

NLN

MMMM

JA/S 2.230.1

BA

L L

Both drives on channel A or B run in parallel and cannot be operated separately. This fact must be

considered in the planning stage.

This solution is often used to save costs.

An alternative here is the use of the Shutter Actuator RA/S 4.230.1, a 4-channel device.

The difference to the other Shutter Actuators is the reduced software functionality features:

– UP/DOWN

– STOP

– Louvre adjustment

– Wind monitor function

The price of the 2 x 2-fold Shutter Actuator JA/S 2.230.1 and the Shutter Actuator RA/S 4.230.1

is practically the same.

14

Circuit design

2.1.4. Bus voltage failure, bus voltage recovery, programming

To prevent uncontrolled movement or stopping at bus voltage failure, bus voltage recovery or

programming, there are many setting options in the ETS with the Shutter Actuator JA/S x.x and

with the Shutter Actuator Module of the Room Controller.

Fig. 7

No reaction here means that the command is executed up until the end, e.g. when the drive is

operating.

No position can be set with bus voltage failure.

2.1.4.1. Status messages

Unlike switchable illumination (simply ON or OFF), the motion of drives is a dynamic process.

Therefore it is frequently interesting to receive status messages with shutters. The following

messages are available for each channel:

– Position (shutter height and position of the louvres, each are a 1 byte telegram)

– End limit position reached (1 bit, both for top or bottom)

– Manual operation

Additionally, a status byte is available which will inform you whether automatic or safety

functions are present.

15

Circuit design

Standard Motor Interface (SMI)

With the use of conventionally available Shutter Actuators and drives, it is not possible to

receive feedback messages directly from the drive, e.g. the position or faults.

This fact changes with the use of intelligent drives which can communicate with the actuator.

A standard for this approach is characterised by the use of the Standard Motor Interface (SMI).

ABB already has a KNX Shutter Actuator for SMI motors, the JA/S 4.SMI.1M.

Fig. 8: Shutter Actuator JA/S 4.SMI.1M and connection schematic

For further information see: www.smi-group.com and manual JA/S 4.SMI.1M

L

L

N

N

A B

I +

C D

I - I + I -

I + I - I + I -

max. 4 x SMI

US US

A B C D

Man.

JA/S 4.SMI.1M

AAAA

JA/SJA SS 44

AAA

A/SA/S

BBB

.SMISMII.1M.1M

BBB

MIMI

CCC DDD

MMMMMMaannn.

L1L2L3

PEN

NL

12

EN3N

max. 4 x SMI

16

Circuit design

2.2 Group and central circuits

A very important function of the KNX systems is the realisation of group and central circuits.

Here the complete building, a fl oor, or an area composed of a combination of functions can be

switched from one or more locations. Using conventional methods, the realisation would re-

quire considerable additional installation time and expense. Using the ABB i-bus® this is simply

possible using the respective programming.

Fig. 9: Push button for shading on the control panel of the Edison training room at ABB

If all external shutters are to open, and all internal curtains are to close simultaneously in an

offi ce building via a central command, a group address with logical 0 for Open blinds and

a logical 1 for Close curtains must be sent.

There are different possibilities available for implementation:

– Move the Shutter Actuator via the Position function, see chapter 3.2 Positions

– By inverting the value of a group address, e.g. with the Logic Module LM/S 1.1 or Appli-

cation Unit ABL/S 2.1

– By sending two group addresses with a push button

1. In a dwelling, all roller blinds in the living room, all drives on the ground fl oor as well as all roller blinds

in the house can be controlled via push buttons.

2. The shading of an offi ce building is retracted every evening; the facade of the building has a uniform

appearance.

3. The caretaker of a school can centrally raise or lower the shading of each individual classroom using

a visualisation system.

With a central command for drives, a separate push button is confi gured for both UP/DOWN commands.

A TOGGLE push button is not useful here, as it is unclear which command is executed next. A free fi eld

of vision to the shading may also not exist.

17

Circuit design

2.2.1. Sending two group addresses

Sending two group addresses is possible, when a group address is sent on the rising edge,

when a push button is pressed as well as on the falling edge when the push button is released.

Both addresses can contain different values.

Devices already featuring this capability are the Binary Inputs BE/S x.x.

Fig. 10

The TRITON push button or the inputs (e.g. BE/S x.x and US/U x.2) with the function

1 bit light scene also enable this function, where two actuator group types use 1 bit

with the presetting ON or OFF.

Fig. 11

18

Circuit design

2.2.2. Central command and status feedback

The description of the available status messages with Shutter Actuators are described in chapter

2.1.4.1 Status messages. It is important to observe the telegram traffi c caused by status feed-

back messages of the individual drives during the implementation of a central group address.

Fig. 12: Central shutter control with Application Unit ABL/S 2.1

When triggering the command via the group address 8/0/7, the west facade moves fi rst,

followed 20 s later by the south facade, another 20 s later by the east facade and fi nally

the north facade with a total delay of one minute. The can be subdivided even more if required

with the objective of sending the feedback telegrams on the bus at different times.

In an offi ce building with twin-face-facade, all windows are electrically operated via the ABB i-bus®.

This command is implemented via a visualisation system. All drives practically move at the same time

and report by telegram when they have reached their fi nal positions, e.g. closed, not closed, maybe their

position also. This is also shown in the visualisation system.

A corresponding communication object is available in the Shutter Actuators JA/S x.x. The consequence is

that the quantity of both line and area telegrams will dramatically increase on the bus.

This approach will lead to an increased bus load and may even cause an overload which will result

in the loss of data where the states of the windows are not correctly represented.

In order to avoid a possible overload of the bus, the central command is staggered, e.g. command

is implemented by storey or facade. Staggered sending is easily implemented with the Application

Unit ABL/S 2.1.

The outputs should be parameterised so that a new object is sent on each calculation. This ensures that

if an identical movement command is received a number of times, e.g. move UP, it will also be undertaken

a number of times.

19

Control functions

3. Control functions

The following control functions are available to operate the shading, windows, skylights and

awnings of a building as comfortably as possible:

– Timer control

– Movement to positions

– Sensor-dependent control

Weather-dependent control

Temperature dependent control

3.1. Timer control

Timer control is an interesting application for electric drives as it allows determined drives to

be operated automatically as a time-dependent function. In addition to the classic possibilities

offered by timer control, this may also be combined with different conditions.

3.1.1. Devices for implementation of timer functions

With a bus system such as the ABB i-bus® it is easy to control the timer with a central time

control clock.

1. In a dwelling the blinds should be raised every morning at 8 a.m. and lowered in the evening at 8 p.m.

2. In an offi ce building the sun screen should be lowered in the evening after the offi ce closes.

The switch actuators alone do not provide the possibility of switching at certain times. This would be too

complex as each device would require its own timer (quartz).

Possible devices for realisation of a timer control are:

– Classic KNX clocks with 2 – 4 channels

– LCD Display MT701

– Room panel/Control panel and Comfort Panel

– Application Unit ABZ/S 2.1 with application Times/Quantities

– Visualisation software

20

Control functions

Fig. 13: Overview KNX devices with time functions

For further information see: Application manual Lighting and lighting control,

Devices for implementation of timer functions

3.1.2. Timer control combined with conditions

In addition to the timer control, linking to different conditions is possible:

– External brightness

– Presence of persons

These functions can be implemented with additional intelligence such as the Application Unit

ABL/S 2.1 or the Logic Module LM/S 1.1. The safety and automatic functions are the excep-

tion, e.g. wind and rain. These already have a high priority in the Shutter Actuator and always

have a higher priority for safety reasons. No external logic except the parameter settings in the

Shutter Actuator is required.

For further information see: chapter 3.3 Sensor-dependent controls

e.g. FW/S 4.5

1 bit, 8 bit Date, time (3 bytes)

Date, time Date and time can be received from (3 bytes) another KNX clock or transferred to there (data format 3 bytes)

1 bit, 8 bit At the set times the 1 bit switching telegram or the 8 bit value telegram are sent

ABZ/S 2.1


Room/control panel


MT/701.2


PC with visualisation

1 bit, 8 bit

L1

L3

L5

L2

L4

L6

21

Control functions

3.1.2.1. Linking with external brightness

Solution with Application Unit ABL/S 2.1

For the closing movement, the operating push button with group address 0/0/3 enables the func-

tion with a logical 1. The clock and the Brightness sensor send a logical 1 in the evening.

The drive closes the shutters if both conditions are fulfi lled; AND condition: dark and 8 p.m.

Fig. 14: Logic for closing movement

For the opening movement, the operating push button with group address 0/0/3 enables

the function with a logical 1. The clock and the light evaluation switch send a logical 0 in the

morning. The drive opens the shutters if both conditions are fulfi lled; OR condition for logical 0:

bright and 8 p.m.

The blinds in a dwelling should be raised every morning at 8 a.m. and lowered in the evening at 8 p.m.

The external brightness should also be considered, i.e. the blinds open at 8 a.m. in the morning,

provided that it is bright outside and close at 8 p.m. in the evening, provided that it is dark outside.

Logical 1 lowers, logical 0 raises the shutters. The timer only has the function of setting a 0 fi lter,

i.e. a logical 0 and as a result the open command is inhibited.

The parameter settings must be observed. The output sends on each calculation.

22

Control functions

Fig. 15: Logic for opening movement

Both states must be 0. Only in this way is the result of the operation a logical 0 and the drive operates

to open the shutters. The timer only has the function of setting a 1 fi lter, i.e. logical 1 and consequently

an close command is inhibited.

The parameter settings must be observed. The output sends on each calculation.

If the input signal is stored in all gates during the inhibit phase, after the function is enabled using the

enable button, the original motion command is activated retrospectively.

23

Control functions

3.1.2.2. Link with presence of persons

Solution with Application Unit ABL/S2.1 or Logic Module LM/S 1.1

Just one gate is suffi cient to implement this function.

The clock sends a telegram with the address 0/0/5 and the value 1 at 5 p.m. The presence

detector disables the telegram of the timer with a detected presence via the control input or

enables it when no presence is detected. By setting the parameter Save during blocking phase,

the drive closes if the room is unoccupied later than 5 p.m.

Fig. 16

The shading of an offi ce building closes in the evening after the offi ce closes. Presence detectors also de-

tect whether there are persons located in the rooms. Using linked conditions, the shading only closes at

5 p.m. in rooms which are not occupied. The shading of the other rooms only automatically closes when

persons have left those rooms.

24

Control functions

3.2. Movement to positions

Movement to a position is a signifi cant function in the area of motor operated applications

in the fi eld of building automation. This function is available in all MDRC Shutter Actuators

JA/S x.x as well as in Shutter Actuator Module JA/M of the Room Controller.

3.2.1. Automatic functions

Using automatic functions it is unnecessary for the user to set these positions manually on-site.

The Positioning function is comparable with a scene.

For further information see: Application manual Lighting and lighting control, Scene

The communication between the sensor which recalls or stores the position and the Shuter

Actuator is via a 1 bit telegram. In this way every sensor can be used without additional devices.

Fig. 17: Shutter Actuator with the Positioning function

1. The shading of a public building moves to a shutter height of 50 % when a button is pressed in the

room. In this manner, the sun does not shine directly into the room, will not dazzle the occupants and

natural light still permeates the room.

2. Louvres are installed in a conservatory to protect against the sun. A brightness sensor detects

the external brightness. When a certain value is exceeded, the shutters move down by 80 % and

the louvres close up to 75 %.

Electrically operated windows are installed in the upper third of the glazed facade of an offi ce building.

The window opens via a push button in the room. The windows can move to three positions dependent

on the wind speeds.

This automatic function offers a high level of comfort and is economic. The heat irradiation from the sun

is reduced and a diffused external lighting source is still provided.

Call position

Save position

Shutter Actuator

Push button

Move to position (height and louvre angle)

25

Control functions

Fig. 18: KNX push button with 4 rockers

3.2.2. Realisation with standard drives

Conventional standard drives in the fi eld of intelligent installations have no option for position

feedback. For this reason the drive is moved over time, i.e. the run time is measured when the

drive moves.

Important here is a knowledge of the total travel time. In this way the drive can be positioned

accordingly.

There are two possibilities for positioning:

1. Indirect positioning

2. Direct positioning

It is possible to defi ne a position via the parameters of the Shutter Actuator, as well as to save the setting

of a modifi ed position.

Using a KNX push button two positions should be recalled and stored. Using the left rocker, switch

position 1 is recalled with a short button push and stored with a long button push. Using the right rocker

switch, position 2 is recalled with a short button push and stored with a long button push.

The software function Shutter is used with the push buttons. This can differentiate between long and

short button actuation.

Using a further rocker switch of the KNX push button, normal UP/DOWN, stop and possibly even louvre

adjustment can be operated.

Shutter >>

Light TV

Light

Position

I 0

1 2

1 2

Short button push:Move to position 1

Long button push:Save position 1

Short button push:Move to position 2

Long button push:Save position 2

Shutter DOWN/STOP Shutter UP/STOP

26

Control functions

3.2.2.1. Indirect positioning

With earlier components it was necessary to move to the end limit position – either the upper

or lower position – before every positioning motion. From this defi ned position the drive is then

moved over time to the actual desired position.

3.2.2.2. Direct positioning

Today, direct positioning of the drive can move from any position directly to the next.

Travel time

Important is the entry of the total travel time of the drive from top to bottom or from bottom

to top. This ensures that the highest possible accuracy is achieved. As it is not possible to

distinguish between upward and downward motion, the mean value of both times is used.

Practical application has shown that there is a slight difference between both times.

The run times should be determined by measurement and entered in the parameters of the

Shutter Actuator.

If an upper or lower end position is reached, the timer is again set to zero.

Indirect positioning can also be set on the Shutter Actuators with positioning for reasons of compatibility

with older components.

Should you only move between the positions without ever reaching an end limit, there is a danger

of inaccuracy. This case will practically never occur in practice. If this is the case however, reference run

Movement to the end limit can be activated via a KNX telegram.

In an offi ce building a reference run should be undertaken at least twice a day to ensure the highest

possible level of accuracy. The reference run is initiated using a timer program before work starts at

6:45 a.m. and during lunch break at 12:45 p.m. These times have been selected to run this function out-

side of normal working hours. The reference run is ended when the drives return to the original position.

This can be set in the parameters, it ensures that the previous state is re-established.

27

Control functions

Positioning of the louvres

In addition to the shutter height, the louvres can also be moved to a defi ned angle. As in

Chapter 2.1 Switching of one or more positions, the louvre positioning is achieved by stepwise

motion of the drive.

Fig. 19: Stepwise motion of the louvre adjustment

Louvre adjustment with MDRC Shutter Actuator JA/S x.x

With the MDRC Shutter Actuators JA/S x.x, the switch on duration of the louvre adjustment

and the number of stages from fully closed to fully open can be set. The shorter the switch-on

duration, the more exact the positioning. The number of steps must be deduced by testing.

Louvre adjustment with the Shutter Actuator Module of the Room Controller RC/A 8.1

With the Shutter Actuator Module of the Room Controller RC/A 8.1, the total motion time of

the Louvre adjustment is parameterised. The number of louvre steps is also determined here.

Multiplied with the switch-on duration, this results in the overall motion time of the Louvre

adjustment.

3.2.2.3. Implementation with intelligent drives

Intelligent drives where there is a direct position feedback have only recently become available.

For further information see: Chapter 2.1.4.1 Status messages or www.smi-group.com

1st button push for louvre adjustment

2st button push for louvre adjustment

Motor voltage

Louvre adjustment time

Time

If the drive is blocked, e.g. shutter has frozen in place or there is an obstacle, it is not possible to detect

this from the Shutter Actuator due to a lack of status feedback. There is an undefi ned relation between

the position of the drive and the detected time.

After removal of the block and movement to the end limit position, the position is once again clear and

the timer is reset to 0.

28

Control functions

3.3. Sensor-dependent control

Sensor dependent control is a very important function in the fi eld of intelligent installations.

This functionality is contained in the software of the Shutter Actuator and serves the needs

of safety, economy and comfort.

A differentiation is made between:

– Weather-dependent control

– Temperature dependent control

3.3.1. Weather-dependent control

The forces of nature act directly on an external shutter or sun screen. These forces can be

damaging for the shutter, blinds or the drive:

– Wind, e.g. damage to the sun screen

– Rain, e.g. the sun screen or the awning made of fabric may not become wet;

there is a danger of damage from mildew

– Frost, e.g. the service life of the fabric is reduced and there is a danger that all

mechanical parts will freeze solid, e.g. in the guide rails

Safety-relevant sensors are very important even with electrically operated windows and

skylights:

– Wind, there is a danger of wind damage to the window, e.g. due to the sail effect

– Rain, ingress of water in the building

Changes in the weather can be detected by safety-relevant sensors from ABB and the drive

(e.g. sun screen) can be controlled as required. The response to the weather is set directly

in the Shutter Actuators.

The sun screen in a school should be moved to a predetermined position if a defi ned brightness value is

exceeded. The sun screen will re-open if the brightness value falls below the threshold. If it is very windy,

the sun screen may not be deployed for safety reasons.

The corresponding telegram from the brightness sensor, 1 bit if the set brightness value is undershot

or overshot, is linked with the UP/DOWN object or the position object with Shutter Actuator.

The value 0 of the telegram raises the drive, the value 1 lowers it.

Safety functions are used with wind, rain and frost. Wind monitoring in particular is required for most

systems. For this reason, this function is already integrated into the Shutter Actuators, i.e. there are

separate communication objects in existence here.

An important basic principle is that the safety functions have a higher priority than classis basic functions.

If a safety event occurs, these functions are inhibited, e.g. on-site operation. Furthermore, the drive

moves to a freely selectable safety position, e.g. close window with rain or raise shutter with wind.

29

Control functions

In the Shutter Actuator, a sequence of priority can be defi ned in addition to the functions wind, rain, frost,

forced operation and blocking.

In order to achieve safe communication between the Weather Station and the Shutter Actuator,

the signals between both devices are monitored. For this purpose it is necessary that a data telegram

is cyclically sent from the sensor on the bus. The Shutter Actuator expects this signal regularly.

If it does not arrive, the drive is brought to the safety position

3.3.1.1. Wind monitor

As the wind is one of the greatest threats for a sun screen, the possible settings are shown

using the wind monitor.

Fig. 20

The times can be freely set. In practice it is normally suffi cient to set the cycle time of the

sensor to 20 – 30 seconds. The monitoring time in the actuator should be programmed to

double or triple time duration. This ensures that the safety function is not implemented

immediately in case of loss of one Telegram, i.e. in an unfavourable case, strong wind and

failure of the sensor, the drive then opens at the latest after the monitoring time.

Furthermore, after the removal of the safety function on the parameters you can set how

the drive should react. It is interesting here to set the parameters to move to saved position,

i.e. the state existing beforehand, e.g. the position of the sunscreen, is reassumed.

Shutter actuatorWeather sensor

Sent GA 3/ 3/ 1

receives on the object windGA 3/ 3/ 1

0: no wind

1: wind, threshold value exceeded

cyclic every 20 smonitoring time 60 s

30

Control functions

Settings in Shutter Actuator JA/S x.x parameters

– 1 wind monitor is active, 3 are possible

– Monitoring period 60 s

Fig. 21: Settings in Shutter Actuator JA/S x.x

Assignment of wind alarm no. 1 on wind monitor no. 1

– Position on wind alarm: UP

– Position when retracted: move to saved position

Fig. 22: Setting options for every individual wind alarm, here no. 1

31

Control functions

Blocking function feature

One distinctive feature is provided by the Blocking function which operates without cyclic

monitoring. For this purpose, a 1 bit Blocking communication object is available. Before the

drive is blocked, it can be moved UP, DOWN or to another position.

The function Blocking is implemented by locking two drives to one another.

3.3.1.2. Weather-dependent sensors

At the moment, the following weather dependent sensors are available for the ABB i-bus®

system:

Brightness Sensor HS/S 3.1 with 3 brightness threshold values

Fig. 23: Brightness Sensor HS/S 3.1

Weather Station WZ/S 1.1 with Weather Sensor WES/A 1.1

Fig. 24: Weather Station WZ/S 1.1 with Weather Sensor WES/A 1.1

Electrically operated curtains and windows are fi tted on an offi ce fl oor. In order to avoid damage, the

window may not be open at the same time as the curtains are closed

WZ/S 1.1

5

L N

6 7 8

Us

1 2 3 4

1 A B2

The relevant weather data mentioned above is available with the Weather Station WZ/S 4.1:

Brightness from three directions, wind, rain, temperature.

32

Control functions

Weather Station WS/S 4.1 with external sensors

As in principle it is a 4-fold analogue input with special software, any analogue weather sensors,

i.e. 0 – 10 V, 0 – 20 mA, etc. can be used.

Fig. 25: Weather Station WS/S 4.1 with external sensors

Analogue Input AE/S 4.2

The software of the Analogue Input AE/S 4.2 has fewer functions that the Weather Station

WS/S 4.1. The parameters are not adapted to the weather sensors.

Fig. 26: Analogue Input AE/S 4.2

WS/S 4.1

A

1 2

B

3 4 5 6 7 8

C D0 V Un

9

L N

10 11 12

Us

33

Control functions

3.3.2. Temperature dependent control

Temperature-dependent controls are very economical, as shutters, roller blinds and awnings

always are related to heat and cold protection. Heating up of the building is prevented by the

reduction of the suns rays. With closed roller blinds, i.e. typical for a dwelling, the insulation

effect of the window is enhanced. This reduces cooling down of the building.

The following automatic functions are available:

– Automatic sun screening

– Automatic heating/cooling

– Night cool down

3.3.2.1. Automatic sun screening

With the Automatic sun screen there is a link between a Light Sensor and a Shutter Actuator:

Fig. 27: Establishment of automatic sun screening

The Automatic sun screen function is already included in the Shutter Actuator JA/S x.x.

For further information see: Product manual Shutter Actuators JA/S x.x

Automatic sun protection

Brightness sensor

Preferred sun protection position

Push button

Sun shutter down and louvre closing or move to position

No sun shutter up

34

Control functions

3.3.2.2. Automatic heating/cooling

The following parameters are linked for the function Heating/cooling automatic:

– Sun

– Shutter

– Presence of persons

– Heating or cooling period

Fig. 28

This function is included in the Shutter Actuators..

For further information see: Product manual Shutter Actuators JA/S x.x

3.3.2.3. Night cool down

Using the Night cool down automatic function it is possible to implement cooling of rooms by

temperature dependent ventilation.

It is not useful to always open the window at fi xed times. With the climate in central Europe it

may be necessary to suspend this function because of a cool day or night in summer.

Brightness sensor

Preferred sun protection position

Sun shutter down and louvre closing or move to position

No sun shutter up

Automatic sun protection

Push button Motion sensor

Thermostat

–

+

The window of a production hall should be opened for cooling early in the morning before work starts in

summer.

35

Control functions

Implementation of night cool down

The internal and external temperatures must be measured for this function:

– Internal temperature via thermostat; for several rooms a reference room should be

selected or even the mean value of several rooms.

– External temperature via Weather Station.

Two conditions must also be fulfi lled:

– Comparator: The internal temperature is higher than the external temperature.

– Threshold: The external temperature is greater than a defi ned fi xed value, e.g. 18 degrees.

The two conditions – comparator and threshold – can be detected using a Logic Module LMS 1.1.

The principle schematic appears as follows:

Fig. 29: Principle schematic

There is an enable button and a clock with set time window. In this time period, e.g. between 5 a.m. and

6 a.m. the automatic function Night cool down occurs. With value 1 the window is opened and closed

with value 0.

Release button

Thermostat

–

+

Weather sensor

external temperature higher than 18 °C

LM/S 1.1

Logic module Shutter actuator

internal temperature higher than external temperature

Window opening/closing

AND logic

36

Control functions

Parameter settings and objects in the Logic Module LM/S 1.1

Two temperature comparators are required. One sends a logical 1 when the internal tempera-

ture is greater than the external temperature; the other one is inverted and sends a 0 when the

external temperature is higher than the internal temperature.

Fig. 30: Logic Module LM/S 1.1, temperature comparator A

Fig. 31: Logic Module LM/S 1.1, temperature comparator B

37

Control functions

The threshold is a defi ned value. This is compared to the current external temperature.

If it is greater for example than 18 °C, the condition is fulfi lled and logic 1 is sent. This will

prevent an extreme cool down during cool nights.

Fig. 32: Logic Module LM/S 1.1, threshold function

For optimisation of this control you can also set the internal temperature to a minimum value,

e.g. greater than 22 °C. This will avoid night cool down with a low room temperature. For this

purpose, only one further threshold function is required in the LM/S 1.1 and one additional

input in the AND gate.

If all conditions are fulfi lled, the window can be opened via an AND function with a further

Logic Module LM/S 1.1. If at least one condition is not fulfi lled, the window will be closed again.

Logic module objects with group addresses:

Fig. 33: Group addresses of the objects

38

Notes

39

Roller Blind/Shutter Control

Building:

Level:

Room:

Smallest common controlled unit no.:

Function:

Intended shutter/blinds:

❏ Internal shutter vertical

❏ Number

❏ Drive

❏ 230 V AC

❏ 24 V DC

❏ 12 V DC

❏ SMI

❏ Other

❏ Current consumption

❏ Reversal time

❏ Travel time

❏ Mechanical end limit switches

❏ Switch off via increased current

❏ No switch off via end switch or increased current

❏ Installation location

❏ Internal shading

❏ Number

❏ Drive

❏ 230 V AC

❏ 24 V DC

❏ 12 V DC

❏ SMI

❏ Other


❏ Reversal time

❏ Travel time





Checklist

40

❏ External shutter

❏ Number

❏ Drive

❏ 230 V AC

❏ 24 V DC

❏ 12 V DC

❏ SMI

❏ Other


❏ Reversal time

❏ Travel time





Manual on-site operation

❏ Conventional push button/switch with fl ush mounted interface

❏ 1 push button (short = lamella, long = moving)

❏ 1 push button (short = Move, long = Lamella)

❏ 1 push button, move only

❏ 1 switch operation, move only

❏ 2 push button, standard

❏ 2 switch operation, move only (roller blinds)

❏ 2 push button operation, move only (roller blinds)

❏ 2 push buttons (only Lamella)

❏ Push buttons: Additional functions:

❏ Other free rocker used for

❏ Status feedback via LED

❏ Orientation light

❏ Bus push button

Make:

Design:

❏ Other free rocker used for

❏ Additional functions:

❏ Status feedback via LED

❏ Orientation light

❏ Number of assigned push buttons

❏ Installation locations

Checklist

41

Superior manual operation

❏ Central operation

❏ Central UP

❏ Central DOWN

❏ Superior group circuit

❏ Number of groups

❏ Function

❏ Integration into manually controlled scenes

❏ Number of scenes

❏ Behaviour with scene call

Automatic control on-site

❏ Controlled with other events on-site

❏

❏

Superior automatic control

❏ Automatic sun screen – on sun

❏ No reaction

❏ DOWN

❏ UP

❏ STOP

❏ Predefi ned position

❏ Position setting via superior control

❏ Automatic sun screen – no sun

❏ No reaction

❏ DOWN

❏ UP

❏ STOP


❏ Heating/cooling automatic

❏ Heating + sun

❏ no reaction

❏ DOWN

❏ UP

❏ STOP


❏ Heating + no sun

❏ no reaction

❏ DOWN

❏ UP

❏ STOP


Checklist

42

❏ Cooling + sun

❏ No reaction

❏ DOWN

❏ UP

❏ STOP


❏ Cooling + no sun

❏ No reaction

❏ DOWN

❏ UP

❏ STOP


❏ Timer

❏ Weekly timer program

❏ Yearly timer program

❏ Number of daily sequences

❏ Number of special days

❏ Twilight switch

❏ Move UP at lx ❏ Move DOWN at lx

❏ Integration into automatically controlled scenes

❏ Number of scenes

❏ Behaviour with scene call

❏ Controlled with other superior events

❏

❏

Checklist

43

Safety functions

❏ Behaviour on wind alarm

❏ Deactivated (does not react to wind alarm)

❏ Activated – no reaction (movement is ended and then blocked)

❏ Activated – UP

❏ Activated – DOWN

❏ Activated – STOP

❏ Behaviour on frost alarm

❏ Deactivated (does not react to frost alarm)





❏ Behaviour on rain alarm

❏ Deactivated (does not react to rain alarm)





❏ Priorities of weather alarms

Wind alarm

Rain alarm

Frost alarm

❏ Behaviour when blocked (e.g. for cleaning)

❏ Deactivated (does not react to block)





❏ Activated – move to position (blind-shutter height/louvre setting)

❏Enable forced operation

❏ Priorities of the safety functions

Weather alarm

Block

Forced operation

Checklist

44

Operation/display at a remote location

❏ Remote controlled

❏ Via telephone

❏ Via LAN

❏ Via Internet

❏ Status message

❏ On visualisation system

❏ Query via telephone

❏ Query via LAN

❏ Query via Internet

Special functions

❏ Integration in occupancy simulation

❏ Inhibit on-site operation at certain times

❏ Times:

❏ Behaviour on inhibit removal

❏ UP

❏ DOWN

❏ State as beforehand

❏ As last “attempted” manual on-site operation

❏ Inhibit on-site operation for certain events/states

❏ Events:

❏ Allow only UP movement at certain times

❏ Allow only DOWN movement at certain times

❏ Switch from certain points with higher priority (forced operation)

Behaviour on priority removal

❏ UP

❏ DOWN

❏ State as beforehand

❏ As last “attempted” manual on-site operation

❏ Partition function

❏ As an open partition common control with

Checklist

Note:We reserve the right to make technical changes

or modify the contents of this document

without prior notice. With regard to purchase

orders, the agreed particulars shall prevail.

ABB AG does not accept any responsibility

whatsoever for potential errors or possible lack

of information in this document.

We reserve all rights in this document and in

the subject matter and illustrations contained

therein. Any reproduction, disclosure to third

parties or utilization of its contents - in whole

or in parts - is forbidden without prior written

consent of ABB AG.

Copyright© 2009 ABB

All rights reserved

www.abb.com/knx

Contact

Ord

er

Num

ber

2C

DC

50

0 0

57

M0

20

1 (0

5/0

9)

2CD

C 0

71 2

79 F

0005

1010

ABB i-bus® EIB / KNX Application Unit Logic ABL/S 2.1, 2CDG 110 072 R0011

ABL/S 2.1ABL/S 2.1Page 1 of 4

ABLS_21_TD_EN_V1-02CDC 509 037 D0201

Technical data

Power supply – Bus voltage– Current consumption, bus– Leakage loss, bus

21 … 32 V DC< 12 mAMax. 250 mW

Connections – EIB / KNX via bus connection terminals

Operating and display elements – Programming LED– Programming button

for assignment of the physical addressfor assignment of the physical address

Enclosure – IP 20 to DIN EN 60 529

Safety class – II to DIN EN 61 140

Isolation category Overvoltage categoryPollution degree

III to DIN EN 60 664-12 to DIN EN 60 664-1

EIB / KNX safety extra low voltage SELV 24 V DC

Temperature range – Operation– Storage– Transport

– 5°C … + 45°C– 25°C … + 55°C– 25°C … + 70°C

Ambient conditions – Maximum air humidity 93 %, no condensation allowed

Design – Modular installation device (MDRC)– Dimensions– Mounting width in space units– Mounting depth

Modular installation device, ProM90 x 36 x 64.5 mm (H x W x D)2, 2 modules at 18 mm64.5 mm

Installation – On 35 mm mounting rail to DIN EN 60 715

Mounting position – as required

Weight – 0.1 kg

Housing/colour – Plastic housing, grey

Approvals – EIB / KNX to EN 50 090-1, -2 Certification

CE mark – in accordance with the EMC guideline and low voltage guideline

The Application Unit Logic is a rail mounted device for insertion in the distribution board. The device contains logical function with the possibility of individual parameter parameterisation. Furthermore, timers with on and off delays and pulse duration, staircase lighting functions and comparators are available.

The device is ready for operation after connection to the bus voltage. The Application Logic Unit is para meterised via the ETS3. The connection to the bus is established using the front side bus connection terminal.

ABB i-bus® EIB / KNX

ABL/S 2.1ABL/S 2.1

Application Unit Logic ABL/S 2.1, 2CDG 110 072 R0011

Page 2 of 4ABLS_21_TD_EN_V1-02CDC 509 037 D0201

10 10

Application program Max. number of

communication objects

Max. number of

group addresses

Max. number of

associations

Logic Time 254EA/2 254 254 254

Note: ETS3 is required for programming. A “.VD3” type file must be imported. The application program is available in the ETS3 at ABB/controller/controller.

See the product manual ”Application Unit Logic ABL/S 2.1” for a detailed description of the application program. The manual is available free of charge on the Internet at www.abb.de/eib.

1010

ABB i-bus® EIB / KNX Application Unit Logic ABL/S 2.1, 2CDG 110 072 R0011

ABL/S 2.1ABL/S 2.1Page 3 of 4

ABLS_21_TD_EN_V1-02CDC 509 037 D0201

Circuit diagram

Dimension drawing2C

DC

072

051

F00

06

1 Label carrier2 Programming button

2CD

C 0

72 0

53 F

0006

3 Programming LED4 Bus connection terminal


ABL/S 2.1ABL/S 2.1

Application Unit Logic ABL/S 2.1, 2CDG 110 072 R0011

Page 4 of 4ABLS_21_TD_EN_V1-02CDC 509 037 D0201

10 10

Notes


AM/S 12.1AM/S 12.1

1 1

Sealed lead acid battery module for maintaining the ABB i-bus® system vol-tage (for up to a minimum of 10 minutes) in case of a mains failure in connection with the Uninterruptible EIB Power Supply SU/S 30.640.1. Connection is made via standard cables.

The Battery Module is for DIN rail mounting device and can easily be snapped onto the mounting rail be-neath the Uninterruptible EIB Power Supply.

The back-up time is dependent on the bus load, however, a minimum of 10 minutes is guaranteed when the EIB line is at capacity (64 bus devices).

With integrated PTC temperature sen-sor for monitoring the charging voltage and integrated fuse.

The temperature sensor must

always be connected to ensure that

the battery is charged correctly!

Technical data

Power supply – Power supply May only be connected to the Uninterruptible EIB Power Supply – Nominal voltage 12 V DC – Battery capacity 1 Ah – Charging current 150 mA – Charging time max. 10 h – Mains failure back-up time min. 10 minutes (dependent on bus load; the back-up time can be reduced due to aging of the battery module)Safety – Temperature sensor Integrated – Fuse Self-healing (integrated)Operating and display elements – NoneConnections – Power supply 2 screw terminals – Temperature sensor 2 screw terminals Cable cross-section: multi-core 0.2 – 2.5 mm2

single-core 0.2 – 4.0 mm2

Type of protection – IP 20, EN 60 529Ambient temperature range – Operation + 5 °C ... + 45 °C – Storage – 25 °C ... + 20 °C – Transport – 25 °C ... + 50 °CDesign – Modular installation device, pro MHousing, colour – Plastic housing, greyMounting – On 35 mm mounting rail, DIN EN 60 715Dimensions – 90 x 144 x 64 mm (H x W x D)Mounting depth/width – 68 mm/8 modules at 18 mmWeight – 0.72 kgCE norm – In accordance with the EMC guideline and the low voltage guideline

Battery Module, 12 VDC, MDRCAM/S 12.1, GH Q631 0062 R0111

SK

003

8 B

02

Page 1 of 2AMS_121_TD_EN_V2-12CDC 501 017 D0201


AM/S 12.1AM/S 12.1

1 1

2 41 3

12VCode150 mA

OK

1

2

Un= 12 V DC

12V

87 109 30V DC

ResetCode /650 mA150 mA

3

4

5

¨

Wiring diagram

1 Label Carrier 4 Battery “–” 150 mA2 Battery connection “+” 5 Connection for temperature sensor3 Code (temperature sensor “–”)

Planning and application Device implementation

The following guidelines should be observed when using the Battery Module AM/S 12.1:1. The Battery Module may only be

connected to the Uninterruptible EIB Power Supply.

2. The Battery Module may only be installed on a horizontal mounting rail (35 mm, EN 50 022) in a wall-mounted distribution board.

3. The Battery Module may not be connected in series or in parallel to other Battery Modules or other sealed lead acid batteries.

4. In the supplied state, the Battery Module is charged or partially charged. The Battery Module must not be stored in a discharged state.

If the Battery Module is stored for longer periods without connection to the Uninterruptible EIB Power Supply, it must be fully charged at least every 6 months. The Battery Module can be stored for max. 2 years at a storage temperature of 20 °C.

5. Once the Battery Module has been discharged during normal operation, it must be recharged as soon as possible.

6. Due to the life span of the sealed lead acid battery, it is advisable to replace the Battery Module with a new device approx. every four years. Used Battery Modules can be returned to your EIB representive for disposal.

Battery Module, 12 VDC, MDRCAM/S 12.1, GH Q631 0062 R0111

S 0

080

Z99

Page 2 of 2AMS_121_TD_EN_V2-12CDC 501 017 D0201

Dimension drawing

SK

003

4 Z

02

��

��

��

�

��

� � �

��

��

��

��

�

Project : PRINCESS NORA BINT ABDULRAHMAN UNIVERSITY - PACKAGE 1

Building : 2.1.0 School of Medicine

Subject: EIB/KNX Lighting Control System

1 Uninterruptible EIB power supply 640 mA, MDRC, SU/S 30.640.1 30

2 Battery Module, 12 V DC, MDRC, AM/S 12.1 30

3 Line Coupler, MDRC, LK/S 4.1 29

4 USB Interface, MDRC, USB/S 1.1 1

5 IP Router, IPR/S 2.1 2

6 Power Supply Units, MDRC, NT/S 12.1600 2

7 Application Unit logic ABL/S 2.1 26

8 Bus Connection Terminals, BUSKLEMME, (Red / Black) 200

9 Brightness sensor HS/S 3.1 10

10 Switch Actuator, 2-fold, 16 A, MDRC, SA/S 2.16.1 7




14 Shutter Actuator, 8-fold, 230 V AC, MDRC, JA/S 8.230.1 39

15 EIB Touchpanel SMARTtouch, color, 6136/100 C-102-500 1

16 Cover Frame for LEAN-/SMARTtouch, Dark Glass, 6136/11-500 1

17 Wall Box for Touchpanels, 6136/UP 1

18 EIB Bus Coupler, FM, 6120-U-102-500 577

19 EIB Presence Detector, FM, 6131-74-102-500, (Alpine White) 514

20 Surface Mounted Base for Presence Detector, 6885-500 514

21 MF Switch Sensor, 4-fold, FM, 6127 MF, (Solo) 63

22 Cover Frame for Switch Sensor, 1721 63

23 OPC Server software S03.03.5.20.03 IP Driver ( IP Router is ABB IPR/S) 1

24 PC (DELL OPTIPLEX 755 ) 1

1 EIB Mini-Center Panels 48 Modules (Type code: GDMS348 RX) 41

2 EIB Mini-Center Panels 80 Modules (Type code: GDMS380 RX) 41

EIB Control Panels

BILL OF QUANTITIES

Item Description Qty.



Subject: Lighting Control details including all corridors

L W

1 1 Switching - a 1

2 3 Switching - a 1

3 5 Switching - a 1

4 3 Switching Emergency-a 1

5 Ckt-1 @ ECB-SM/B4-1 Switching Emergency 1

6 5 Switching 1

7 5 Switching emergency 1

8 5 Switching 1


10 4 Switching-a 1

11 6 Switching-a 1

12 7 Switching-a 1

13 5 Switching Emergency 1


15 9 Switching - a 1

16 7 Switching - b 1

17 Ckt-1 @ ECB-SM/B4-1 Switching emergency 1


19 Switching - a 1

20 Switching - b 1

21 Switching - c 1


23 Switching - d 1

24 Switching - e 1

25 Switching - f 1


27 Switching - a 1

28 Switching - b 1

29 2 Switching Emergency - a 1


31 12 Switching 1

32 Ckt-5 @ ECB-SM/B4-1 Switching emergency 1


34 1 Switching - d 1



37 10 Switching - c 1




27 2 40 0

L W LRP-SM/G1-1 ELP-SM/G1-1 PP-SM/G1-1

1 Switching - a 1

2 Switching - b 1

3 Switching - c 1

4 Switching - g 1

5 Switching - d 1

6 Switching - e 1

7 Switching - b 1

8 Switching - h 1

5

12

-

13.2

5

5

12

12

10

7

8

8

7

Lockers, B-30111

2 5

Emergency Circuit Number Power Circuit Number Control Type

Number

of

Shutter

2 1

S.N Load Served Area

Normal

Circuit

Number

EIB-LP-SM/B4-1 @ Basement Floor

Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Lockers, B-30211

Prosection Area, B-340 and

Cadavar Cold Storage Unit, B-341

1

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

1

4

Presence

Detector

4

2 1

2

Histology Hall, B-300

2

2

5

Total:

Panel Board @ Ground Floor

Toilet - B030 -

1

Technicianav room-b352

Anatomy Dissection Hall, B-310

Anatomy Dissection Hall, B-330

Scullery-B305

Scullery-B306

13 12

2.7

2.7

13

Large Classroom-G540

1

19

4

Remarks / Comments

1

Instuctor -b353

Suppervisor-b351 1

1 Cadaver handler-b350

1 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence

DetectorRemarks / Comments

9 Switching Emergency - a 1

10 Switching Emergency - b 1

11 Projector Circuit 1

12 Projector Screen 2



15 2 Window Curtain 4

16 Switching - a 1

17 Switching - b 1

18 Switching - c 1

19 Switching - g 1

20 Switching - d 1

21 Switching - e 1

22 Switching - d 1

23 Switching - h 1

24 Switching Emergency - c 1

25 Switching Emergency - d 1






31 Store- G523 5 Switching Conventional Switch

32 Store- G510 22 Switching Conventional Switch


34 3 Switching emergency - a 1

35 Switching 1

36 Switching - b 1

37 3 Switching emergency - b 1

38 7 Switching 1


40 7 Switching 1


42 7 Switching 1


44 7 Switching 1


46 7 Switching 1


48 7 Switching 1




52 9 Switching

53 11 Switching emergency

54 Jan - G041 9 Switching

55 9 Switching


57 Switching - a 1

58 Switching - b 1

59 3 Switching emergency - e 1

-

5.4

13.2

5.4

5.5

4

-

5.1

10

5.1

5

5

8

1

1

Tutorial - G507 1 5

Security Operation- G522

1 1

Meeting-G514 1 1

Meeting-G516 2.4

2.4 4

1 1

Meeting-G512 1 1

Meeting-G513 2.4

2.4

4

4

1

Meeting-G510 1 1

Meeting-G511 1 2.4

2.4

4

4

1

6

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch


Elec - G043

IDF - G042

Toilet - G040

2

Tutorial-G5202

3

4

9

10

21

1

2 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence


60 Switching - c 1

61 Switching - d 1

62 3 Switching emergency - d 1

63 Switching - c 1

64 Switching - d 1

65 3 Switching emergency - f 1

66 Switching - b 1

67 Switching - e 1

68 3 Switching emergency - c 1

69 Switching a 1

70 Switching c 1









79 Provision Library (Library G-400) 22 17 12 11 6 4

80 4 53 Ckt-7 @ PP-SM/G1-2 Window Curtain 2 2

81 Ckt-9 @ PP-SM/G1-2 Window Curtain 2

82 Ckt-10 @ PP-SM/G1-2 Window Curtain 2

83 Stiars-1, GS01 Ckt-7 @ ECB-SM/G1-1 Switching Emergency 1 Al-ways On

84 Stiars-1, GS01 Ckt-6 @ ECB-SM/G1-1 Switching Emergency 1 Al-ways On

38 12 69 26


1 Switching - a 1

2 Switching - b 1

3 Switching - c 1

4 Switching - g 1

5 Switching - d 1

6 Switching - e 1

7 Switching - f 1

8 Switching - h 1


10 Switching Emergency - h 1






16 Switching a 1

17 Switching b 1

18 Switching c 1

19 Switching g 1

20 Switching d 1

21 Switching e 1

22 Switching f 1

23 Switching h 1


7

10

13.2

13

26

5.5

5.4

10

5

5.1

Tutorial-G505

Tutorial-G521

Small Classroom-G5025

4

5

8

8

5.5

1

1

2

5

1

Small Classroom-G503 1 1

Ckt-2 @ PP-SM/G1-2

Tutorial-G5065

4 2

4

6


Total:


1

21

1

10

Corridor - G075

2 1

Ckt-12 @ PP-SM/G1-2

4 1

2 Large Classroom-G610

16

23

1

4

3 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence








31 Switching - a 1

32 Switching - b 1


34 25 Projector Circuit 1

35 25 Projector Screen 2

36 Store-G604 3 Switching Conventional Switch

37 Switching - a 1

38 Switching - b 1

39 3 Switching Emergency - b 1

40 Switching - b 1

41 Switching - d 1


43 Switching - a 1

44 Switching - c 1


46 Switching - a 1

47 Switching - b 1

48 Switching - c 1

49 5 Switching Emergency - d 1




53 Ckt-8 @ ECB-SM/G1-1 Switching Emergency - a 1

54 4 Switching

55 4 Switching Emergency

56 4 Switching


58 Switching - a 1

59 Switching - c 1

60 Switching - e 1

61 Switching - b 1

62 Switching - d 1

63 Switching - e 1


65 Switching Emergency 1





70 Store-G604 18 Switching Conventional Switch

71 Ckt-24 @ PP-SM/G2-2 Window Curtain 1 2


73 Window Curtain 1 2

74 Window Curtain 1 2

75 Corridor - G008 31 4.4 Ckt-15 @ PP-SM/G2-2 Window Curtain 1 2

27 5

13

5.3

3.2

3.2

7

5

7.8

9

5.6

5.3

5

Meeting-G603

9

11

1

1

Meeting-G605

IDF - G012Conventional Switch

1

2

Meeting-G60219

1

Open Computer Lab-G606

3

1

51

10

6

191 1

Small Classroom-G501

2

1 1

23


5

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Conventional SwitchElec - G013

Toilet - G010

4 2

Ckt-27 @ PP-SM/G2-224

Ckt-9 @ PP-SM/G2-2

Ckt-11 @ PP-SM/G2-2

6

18

Corridor - G009

Corridor - G005

4 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence


76 Corridor - G071 20 4 Ckt-12 @ PP-SM/G2-2 Window Curtain 1 2

77 Corridor - G073/ 75 54 4 Ckt-10 @ PP-SM/G2-2 Window Curtain 2 2

31 11 54 38


1 Switching - a 1

2 Switching - b 1

3 Switching - c 1

4 Switching - e 1

5 Switching - a 1

6 Switching - b 1

7 Switching - c 1

8 Switching - d 1










18 Reception Counter- G114 3 3.5 9 Switching - h 1 1


20 Switching emergency 1

21 9 Switching - f 1


23 9 Switching - e 1







30 9 Switching 1


32 9 Switching - g 1


34 11 Switching - h 1

35 4 Switching emergency - f 1

36 Switching - g 1

37 Switching 1






43 Switching - c 1

44 Switching - g 1



47 4 Switching emergency - c 1 4.2

3.4

3.4

3.4

4.5

3

4.6

3.4

5

7.5

3.5

5

3

13

4

4

4.5

4.5

5

4.5

10

4.3

10

6.6

3

6

ASSMT OFF -G132

AD AF OFF-G120

Total:

11

11

ST AF Co Dir - G130

AC AF OFF-G100

AD AF OFF-G130

AA-G726+G727+G728+729+G730

AC AF OFF-G101


Large Classroom - G210

ST AF Dir - G131

2

14

17

5

24

4

1

ST Reg Off - G112 1

ST Reg AA - G115 7

Copy Center - G027

1

ST AF Off - G110 1

ST AF Off - G111 1

5

4.5

4.5

3

ST Reg Dir - G113 1

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

5 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence




50 Switching - a 1

51 Switching -b 1










61 Switching - a 1

62 Switching - b 1

63 Switching - c 1

64 Switching - d 1

65 Switching - e 1







72 Store - G224 4 Switching Conventional Switch



75 Jan - G021 6 Switching

76 6 Switching


78 6 Switching


80 Switching - a 1

81 Switching - b 1


83 Switching - c 1

84 Switching - d 1




88 18 & 20 Switching 1


90 Corridor-G090 20 5.5 19 & 21 Switching 1



93 18 Window Curtain 1 2


95 Corrdior - G088 25 5.5 Ckt-9 @ PP-SM/G3-2 Window Curtain 1 2

42 7 81 18

L W LRP-SM/G4-1 ELP-SM/G4-1 PP-SM/4-1

19.7

3.5

6

15.5

1.5

-

3.5

7.6

5

5

13

4.2

6

4

2.6

5

5

4

1.5

4.6

2.5

9.5

-

4.5

4.5

5.6

4

1

ASSMT OFF -G133 1

ASSMT MTG -G13411

1

IDF - G022

4

9

1

IT MGR - G222 1

PC Tech -G223

AV Tech - G221

1

Toilet - G020

AA - G220

Large Classroom - G201 4 2

8

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

8

Conventional Switch

1 1 8

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

6

Computer Lab-G150 1

Meeting Room - G203

Meeting Room - G202

LV Panels - G025

1

Hallway-G091 1

15.5Hallway-G093 1

Total:

EIB-LRP-SM/G4-1 @ Ground Floor

Corridor - G086

6 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence


1 Switching - a 1

2 Switching - b 1

3 Switching - c 1

4 Switching - d 1







11 Switching - a 1

12 Switching - b 1


14 Switching - c 1

15 Switching - d 1


17 Switching - a 1

18 Switching - b 1

19 Switching - c 1

20 Switching - d 1

21 Switching - a 1

22 Switching - b 1

23 Switching - c 1

24 Switching - e 1








32 Switching - a 1

33 Switching - b 1

34 Switching - c 1


36 Toilet G030 7 8 ELP-SM/G-21 6 2

37 17 Switching 1


39 17 Switching 1


41 Switching - a 1

42 Switching - b 1


44 Switching - c 1

45 Switching - d 1


47 Switching - g 1

48 Switching - h 1


50 Switching - e 1

51 Switching - f 1

5.2 6

13.2

3.2

4.6

4.6

3.2

3.2

13.2

5.2

10

11.2

3

3

9.5

5.2

5.2


1

Prep-G309

Meeting Room - G3213

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

2

Meeting Room - G3223

1 1

1

1

4

1


5

18

2

14

18

Meeting Room - G323

Meeting Room - G324

2

Tutorial - G3032

1

1

1

Tutorial - G307

Tutorial - G304

1

5.2

6

6

6

5.2

Tutorial - G3082

7 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence



53 Switching - e 1

54 Switching - f 1


56 Switching - a 1

57 Switching - c 1


59 Switching - a 1

60 Switching - g 1


62 Switching - b 1

63 Switching - d 1


65 Switching - a 1

66 Switching - b 1

67 Switching - a 1

68 Switching - d 1





73 Ckt-5 @ ECB-SM/G4-1 Switching Emergency 1





78 Ckt-12 @ PP-SM/ G4-2 Window Curtain 2





83 Stair-4 Ckt-6 @ ECB-SM/G4-1 Switching Emergency 1 Always On

84 Stair-4 Ckt-5 @ ECB-SM/G4-1 Switching Emergency 1 Always On

38 8 73 26


1 3 Switching - a 1


3 3 Switching - b 1


5 3 Switching - c 1


7 3 Switching - d 1


9 5 Switching - e 1








5.5

5.5

4.2

6

6

24

54

11.2

4

2.5

5.2

5.2

5.2

5.2

Panel Board @ First Floor

6Science Lab -G310

6

Corridor - G083

4

Corridor - G080

Total:

Tutorial - G3021

6

6

Tutorial - G3061

1

Tutorial - G3051

Tutorial - G3011

2

Ckt-19 @ PP-SM/ G2-1

Ckt-21 @ PP-SM/ G2-1

1

1

1

6

Copy Center-1434 1

1

SGL OFF - 1431 1

SGL OFF-1429 2.7

3 4.2

DBL OFF-1512 N/A 1

SGL OFF - 1432 1 3

5.2

DBL OFF-1422 N/A

3.2

3.2

DBL OFF-1424 N/A

5.2

5.2 3.2

1

1

1 N/ADBL OFF-1426 5.2 3.2

8 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence




19 Switching - a 1

20 Switching - b 1

21 Switching - c 1

22 Switching - d 1

23 11 Switching c Emergency 1

24 Ckt-8 @ PP-SM/11-2 Window Curtain 2

25 Switching - a 1

26 Switching - b 1


28 Switching - a 1

29 Switching - b 1

30 Switching - c 1




34 Storage-1440 11 Switching Conventional Switch

35 Switching - a 1

36 Switching - b 1

37 Switching - c 1

38 Switching - d 1


40 Ckt 5 @ ECB-SM/11-1 Switching Emergency 1










50 Stor-1430 2 Switching Conventional Switch






56 2 Switching emergency -a 1

57 Switching - a 1

58 Switching - b 1

59 Switching - c 1

60 3 Switching Emergency - c 1

61 Switching - a 1

62 Switching - b 1

63 Ckt-10 @ ECB-SM/11-1 Switching Emergency 1

64 29 Switching


66 29 Switching


8.7

13.5

3.3

3.2

3.2

3.3

6.5

7.2

10

5.1

5

12.7

10

5.1

5.1

13.2

Conventional Switch

13

7

1 N/ADBL OFF-1428 5.2 3.2

Anatomy Physology Prep - 1410

Anatomy Physology Dry Lab -

1409

Anatomy Physology Dry Lab -

1512

2 1

1 1

Conventional Switch

1 1

18

Meeting-14219

Small Classrooms - 1439

11

5.2

8.2

4 1

Ckt-11 @ PP-SM/11-2

4 1

2

1

1 SGL OFF-1423

6

1

SGL OFF-1425 1

AA - 1435 TO 14384

SGL OFF-1427

Toilet - 101029

6

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Elec - 1011

IDF -1012

9 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence


68 29 Switching


70 Switching - a 1

71 Switching - b 1

72 Ckt-9 @ ECB-SM/11-1 Switching Emergency - a 1

73 6 Switching


75 6 Switching











86 17 Switching Emergency - e 1


88 17 Switching Emergency - f 1

89 Prayer 1550 30 Conventional Switch



92 Corridor - 1070 6 Window Curtain 1 2



95 Ckt-1 @ ELP-SM/11-1 Switching Emergency - b 1


97 Ckt-1 @ ELP-SM/11-1 Switching Emergency - c 1


99 Ckt-1 @ ELP-SM/11-1 Switching Emergency - d 1


101 Ckt-1 @ ELP-SM/11-1 Switching Emergency - e 1


103 Ckt-1 @ ELP-SM/11-1 Switching Emergency - f 1

52 5 81 18


1 Switching - a 1

2 Switching - b 1

3 Switching - c 1

4 Switching - d 1

5 Switching - e 1









10

6

6

6

6

6

13

3

3.2

3

3

Study-1402

Study-1403

Anatomy & Physiology Dry Lab -

1502

1

1

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

1


Total:

LV PANEL -1018

Study-1401

Toilet - 1040

IDF -1043

Elec - 1042

6

6.3

1

6

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

1

Study-1404

Study-1405 1

1

Corridor - 1008

Study-1406 1 6.3 6


1

8

4

1

Chair -1405

SGL OFF -1403

1

SGL OFF -1406

SGL OFF -1407

1

1

1 SGL OFF -1404

10 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence






18 Switching - a 1

19 Switching - b 1

20 Switching - c 1

21 Switching - d 1

22 Switching - a 1

23 Switching - b 1

24 Switching - c 1

25 Switching - d 1





30 Ckt-12 @ PP/SM12-4 Window Curtain 2

31 7 Switching 1



34 Store - 1804 7 Switching Conventional Switch





39 15 Switching 1

40 30 Switching 1






46 Ckt-4 @ ECB-SM/11-1 Switching emergency 1




50 Switching - a 1

51 Switching - b 1

52 Switching - c 1

53 Switching - d 1

54 Switching - a 1

55 Switching - b 1

56 Switching - c 1

57 Switching - d 1






63 8 Switching a 1

64 20 Switching a 1

6.7

18

3.2

3.2

10.3

3.2

10

18

3.5

10.4

10.4

13.2

5.5

13

10.2

15.5

6

2

Corridor-1004

Anatomy & Physiology PREP -

1806

Anatomy & Physiology Wet Lab -

1808

5

4

2

1

Ckt-10 @ UPP/SM11-2


15031

2 1


15092

12

4

1


1510

1

4

Anatomy & Physiology prep - 1505

1

Office - 1504 1

8

26

Biology Supplies Storage - 1506

1

0

3.2

Anatomy & Physiology Wet Lab -

18024 1

Ckt-10 @ PP/SM12-3


12.2

11 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence






69 Stor-1507 20 Switching 1 1

70 Corridor - 1002 24.5 5.5 Ckt-12 @ PP/SM12-5 Window Curtain 1 2

71 Corridor - 1005 6 20 Ckt-17 @ PP/SM12-5 Window Curtain 1 2

32 8 56 28


1 1 Switching - a 1


3 1 Switching - b 1


5 1 Switching - c 1


7 1 Switching - d 1


9 1 Switching - e 1




















29 Switching - a 1

30 Switching - b 1





35 Ckt-6 @ ECB-SM/14-1 Switching emergency-a 1

36 Jan - 1023 7 Swicthing

37 7 Swicthing


39 7 Swicthing


41 Switching - f 1

42 Switching - f 1

3.2

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

6

4.7

3.2

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.2

3.2

13.5

3.3

6.2

4.5

4.5

7.7

3.5

3.5

4.5

4.5

4.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

10

4.5

4.5

4.5

IDF - 1022

LV Panels - 1028

Total:


DBL OFF -1201

DBL OFF -1204

9

Conventional Switch

1

Ckt-7 @ PP/SM12-5


15084

DBL OFF -1203

1

DBL OFF -1202 1

1

1

SGL OFF-1210

DBL OFF -1205 1

1

4.5

SGL OFF-1211

SGL OFF-1212 3.2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

32

Meeting-1220

4

1 1

Conventional Switch

6

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

SGL OFF-1232

1 Manager-1106

SGL OFF-1234

SGL OFF-1213

SGL OFF-1214

Toilet - 1020

SGL OFF-1231

SGL OFF-1233 1

12 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence


43 Switching - g 1

44 7 Switching Emergency -e 1



47 WC -1101 2.2 2 Swicthing 1 1

48 WC -1102 2.2 2 Swicthing 1 1

49 Switching - d 1

50 Switching - c 1



53 Switching - a 1

54 Switching - b 1









63 3 Switching Emergency - i 1



66 Switching - a 1

67 Switching - b 1

68 Switching - c 1

69 Switching - d 1

70 Switching - e 1





75 10 Swicthing - a 1



78 9 Switching Emergency -d 1


80 Switching - b 1

81 Switching - a 1

82 9 Switching Emergency -c 1


84 WC 2 2 12 swicthing - a 1 1

85 12 Swicthing - a 1

86 9 Switching Emergency -b 1


88 Store-1209 4.5 3 26 Swicthing 0 1

89 Switching - a 1

90 Switching - f 1



93 1 Switching Emergency - g 1

4.6

4.7

4.7

5.5

4.5

4.5

4.5

6.2

5

6

5.7

4.7

3.2

4.4

7.5

6

8

1

ST Reg Off & Reception -11219

ST Reg Off -1120

1

Assco Dean -1103

1 Dean Office -1108

11

5.7

1

1

1 Manager-1107

AA-1223 to 1228 8.2

4.7

7

2 1

1 1

1

1

Copy Center-1027

8

Dean Reception-1123 N/A

Ckt-29 @ PP-SM/13-1

Dean's Meeting - 1130

6.6

9

Conf-1124

12

1 1

Dean Pantry-1125

DBL OFF -120626

Dean Loung-1113

4.5 3.2

4.5

1

1

1

DBL OFF -12074.5 3.2

1 Manager-1106

9

Asst Dean-1100

5

3

1

4.5

5.5

13 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence



95 1 Switching Emergency - h 1







102 Store-1218 4 3 28 Swicthing 1 1

103 28 Switching - i 1













116 Corridor - 1095 26 5.3 25 Window Curtain 1 2

117 Dean AA-1111 3 3 11 Switching Emergency - g 1 1

118 Dean AA-1112 3 3 11 Switching Emergency - f 1 1




122 Switching - b 1


124 AA-1126 2.5 2.8 11 Switching Emergency - a 1 1

125 AA-1122 2.5 2.8 11 Switching Emergency - b 1 1

126 A Dean AA-1105 2.5 2.8 11 Switching Emergency - c 1 1

127 10 Swicthing - d 1


63 5 112 22


1 1 Switching - a 1


3 1 Switching - d 1


5 1 Switching - c 1


7 1 Switching - b 1


9 Store-1309 4.4 3 1 Swicthing 0 1






4.5

2.5

4.4

4.4

1

1 DBL OFF -1208 4.5 3.2

SGL OFF-1215

SGL OFF-1216

4

4

3.2

3.2

1

1

1

1

SGL OFF-1217

SGL OFF-1229

4

3.7

4.5

4.5

3.2

SGL OFF -1236

1

1

Chair - 1238

SGL OFF -1237

Corridor - 1084

SGL OFF -1235

1 4.5

4.5 3.3

3.34.5

MGR AA-1110 1 3 4.2

1 1

1

DBL OFF-1306

CONF-1109

A Dean AA-1104

Total:


DBL OFF-1305 1

1

1

1

DBL OFF-1307

DBL OFF-1308

4.4

4.4

3.2

3.2

SGL OFF -1314

SGL OFF -1315

3.5

3.5

3.2

3.2

1

1

1 SGL OFF -1316 3.5 3.2

4

7

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

4.3

4.3

14 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence





18 Store-1318 3 Swicthing 1 1














32 Ckt-1 @ ELP-SM/11-1 Switching Emergency - a 1

33 Switching - a 1

34 Switching - b 1







41 Ckt- 5 @ ECB-SM/14-1 Switching emergency 1

42 6 Swicthing


44 6 Swicthing



47 1 Switching Emergency -a 1








55 3 Switching Emergency -i 1











3.5

3.5

3.5

4.5

4.5

4.5

7.7

8

1

1

SGL OFF -1316

SGL OFF -1317

3.5

3.5

3.2

3.2

1

SGL OFF- 1329

Chair- 1337

4

4.5

4

6.8

SGL OFF-1333

SGL OFF-1334

4.5

4.5

3.2

3.2

SGL OFF-1335

SGL OFF-1336

4.5

4.5

3.2

3.2

1

1

1

1

SGL OFF -1402 5

1

1

1

Meeting-1320

1

1

2

Ckt-27 @ PP-SM/14-1

6

Conventional Switch

6

Elec - 1033

AA-1321 to 1325

Toilet - 1030

Conventional Switch

DBL OFF-1302

DBL OFF-1301

Conventional Switch

1

1

IDF - 1032

1

1

DBL OFF-1303

DBL OFF-1304 4.5

3.2

Conventional Switch

SGL OFF-1310

SGL OFF-1311

1

1

3.2

1

1

SGL OFF-1312

SGL OFF-1313 3.5

Chair-1332

SGL OFF-1331

4.5

4.5

6.5

3.2

1

1

3.5

6.7

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

15 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence





69 5 Switching Emergency -i 1




39 1 64 8

L W LRP-SM/21-1 ELP-SM/21-1 PP-SM/21-1

1 1 Switching - e 1


3 1 Switching - d 1


5 1 Switching - c 1


7 1 Switching - b 1


9 1 Switching - a 1




13 Store - 2518 3.5 3 3 Swicthing Conventional Switch















28 Stor - 2509 4.5 3 5 Swicthing 1 1


30 1 Switching emergency - j 1








38 3 Switching Emergency - j 1


40 3 Switching emergency - h 1



3.5

4.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

4.5

3.5

6

3.5

1

3.2 1

6.5

SGL OFF-1330

Chair-1230

4.5

4.5

1

1

1

1

SGL OFF -2529 1

1

4

3.5

1

1

1

1

1

Chair -2430

DBL OFF - 2507 1

1 DBL OFF - 2508

4.5

4.5

3.5

1

1

SGL OFF -2531 1

Chair -2532

1

1

3.53.2

3.5

1

1 SGL OFF -2512

SGL OFF - 2535

SGL OFF - 2536

Total:

Panel Board @ Second Floor

SGL OFF - 2533

SGL OFF - 2534

3.5

3.5

SGL OFF -2511

SGL OFF -2530

SGL OFF -2510

DBL OFF - 2506

SGL OFF -2517

DBL OFF - 2505

SGL OFF -2515

Chair - 2537

Corridor - 1079

SGL OFF -2516

56

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

6.8

3.8

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

6.4

3.2

3.2

6.5

3.2

3.2

16 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence














55crk 2, LP-

SM/21-1Switching a 1


57 Switching - a 1

58 Switching - b 1





63 Ckt-6 @ ECB-SM/21-1 Switching Emergency 1

64 Swicthing

65 Switching Emergency

66 Swicthing

67 Switching Emergency

68 Prayer 16





39 1 61 10


1 1 Switching - a 1


3 1 Switching - b 1


5 1 Switching - c 1


7 1 Switching - d 1


9 1 Switching - e 1


11 3 Switching a 1








4.5

4.5

3.5

3.5

4.5

4.5

7.7

3.5

3.5

4.5

4.5

4.5

8.2

3.5

3.5

4.5

1 AA -

2521+2522+2523+2524+2526

SGL OFF -2514 1

1

1

1

1

1

1

25

4

1

1

1

Conventional Switch

1

1

1

1

1

DBL OFF - 2402

SGL OFF - 2414

Elec - 2043

IDF - 2042

DBL OFF - 2401

SGL OFF - 2413

SGL OFF - 2412

SGL OFF - 2410

SGL OFF - 2411

Corridor - 2009

Meeting - 2520

DBL OFF - 2504

DBL OFF - 2503

SGL OFF -2513

DBL OFF - 2501

DBL OFF - 2502

Conventional Switch

6

DBL OFF - 2403

DBL OFF - 2404

Conventional Switch

Toilet - 2040

Conventional Switch

1

1

Conventional Switch

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

6.7

6

3

3.2

3.2

Total:


3.5

4 50

3.2

3.2

3

3.2

3.2

3.2

17 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence




21 5 Switching a 1









30 Ckt-9 @ ECB-SM/21-1 Switching Emergency - a 1

31 2 Swicthing


33 2 Swicthing


35 2 Swicthing




39 Switching - a 1

40 Switching - b 1



















59 Stor - 2409 4.5 3 16 Swicthing Conventional Switch











3.5

32

8.2

7.7

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

4.5

3.5

1

Conventional Switch

1

Conventional Switch

1

6

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

1

1

1 1

20

Meeting - 2420

6

1

SGL OFF - 2415

SGL OFF - 2416

1

3.5 3.2

SGL OFF - 2417

SGL OFF - 2429

3.5

3.7

3.2

4

1

1

1

1

DBL OFF - 2406

DBL OFF - 2407

4.5

4.5

3.2

3.2

DBL OFF - 2408

SGL OFF - 2435

4.5

3.5

3.2

3.2

1

1

1

1

1

SGL OFF - 2436

SGL OFF - 2437

Corridor - 2002

SGL OFF - 2438

3.5

AA -

2423+2424+2425+2427+2428

SGL OFF - 2434

SGL OFF - 2432

DBL OFF - 2405

LV Panels - 2015

IDF - 2012

SGL OFF - 2433

Toilet - 2010

Chair - 2431

Elec - 2013

Conventional Switch

1

3.2

6.5

3.2

3.2

3.2

6.7

6

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.7

4.5

18 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence


70 Corridor - 2004 4 50 4 Window Curtain 1 2

36 1 58 8


1 1 Switching a 1


3 1 Switching - b 1


5 1 Switching - c 1


7 1 Switching - d 1


9 1 Switching - e 1


11 3 Switching a 1

























36 Ckt-9 @ ECB-SM/24-1 Switching emergency - a 1

37 4 Swicthing

38 11 Swicthing

39 4 Swicthing

40 11 Swicthing

41 4 Swicthing

42 11 Swicthing

43 Switching - a 1

44 Switching - b 1





7.7

3.8

6.8

4.5

8


DBL OFF - 2201

Total:

1

DBL OFF - 2202 1 4.5

3

3.2

DBL OFF - 2203

DBL OFF - 2204

4.5

4.5

3.2

3.2

1

1

1

1

DBL OFF - 2205

SGL OFF - 2210

4.5

3.5

3.2

3

SGL OFF - 2211

SGL OFF - 2212

3.5

3.5

3.2

3.2

1

1

1

1

SGL OFF - 2213

SGL OFF - 2214

3.5

3.5

3.2

3.2

SGL OFF - 2231

SGL OFF - 2232

3.5

3.5

3.2

3.2

1

1

1

SGL OFF - 2233

SGL OFF - 2234

3.5

3.5

3.2

3.2

AA - 2223 to 2228

Study - 2026

1

1 1

Copy Center - 2027

Toilet - 2020 6

1

23

DBL OFF - 2206

Meeting - 2220

6

4.5 1

Elec - 2022

IDF - 2023

LV Panels - 2016

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

1

1

Conventional Switch

6.7

7.2

7.2

6

3.2 19 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence





52 4.5 3.2 14 Switching - c 1

53 4.5 3 Switching Emergency - h 1

54 Store- 2209 4.5 3 14 Switching Conventional Switch




58 Switching - b 1


60 Switching - c 1

61 Switching - c 1


63 Stor - 2218 3.5 3 16 Swicthing Conventional Switch 1









72 18 Switching d 1






39 1 65 10


1 1 Switching - e 1


3 1 Switching - d 1


5 1 Switching - c 1


7 1 Switching - b 1


9 1 Switching - a 1










19 Store- 2309 4.5 3 5 Swicthing 1 1


DBL OFF - 2208

3.5

3.5

3.5

4.5

3.7

4.5 1

1

DBL OFF - 2206

DBL OFF - 2207

4.5

1

1

SGL OFF - 2215 1

SGL OFF - 2216

SGL OFF - 2217 1 16

SGL OFF - 2236

SGL OFF - 2229

SGL OFF - 2235

3.7

3.5

3.5

3.2

4

1

1

1

1

1


SGL OFF - 2333

SGL OFF - 2237

Total:

CHAIR - 2238

3.5

3.5

3.5

SGL OFF - 2334 1 3.5

6.8

SGL OFF - 2335

1

1 3.5

3.2

3.2

3.2

1

Chair - 2337

SGL OFF - 2336 3.5

3.5

3.2

1

1

1

1

DBL OFF - 2307

DBL OFF - 2306 4.5

4.5

4.5

1

DBL OFF - 2308

Chair - 2230 3.5 6.5 1

DBL OFF - 2305

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

7

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

Corridor - 2093

3.2

3.2

3.2

50

32 5.5

20 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence




































55 Swicthing - a 1


57 Switching a 1

58 Switching b 1





63 Ckt-6 @ ECB-SM/24-1 Switching emergency - a 1

64 6 Swicthing


66 JANI - 2031 6 Swicthing

67 6 Swicthing


69 Prayer, 2350 16



4.5

4.5

4.5

8.2

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

IDF - 2033

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

1

Chair - 2230

SGL OFF - 2330

3.5

3.5

6.5

3.2

Chair - 2332

SGL OFF - 2331 1

1

1

1

1

SGL OFF - 2312

SGL OFF - 2310

SGL OFF - 2311

3.5

3.5SGL OFF - 2313

3.2 1

1

1

1

SGL OFF - 2317

SGL OFF - 2315

SGL OFF - 2316

3.2

SGL OFF - 2329 3.8

4.5DBL OFF - 2301

3.8

3.2

1

1

1

1

1

1 DBL OFF - 2303 3.2

2 1

DBL OFF - 2304 1

AA - 2323 to 2328

3.2

6.7

6

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Toilet - 2030

Conventional Switch

Conventional Switch

Corridor - 2083

Meeting - 2320

4

Elec - 2032

7.7 1 1

29

SGL OFF - 2314

DBL OFF - 2302

3.2

6.5

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.2

4 25

6

3.2

21 of 22




L W


Number

of

Shutter


Normal

Circuit

Number


Area

dimensions

Number

of on/off

channels

Switch

Sensor, 4-

fold,

Presence



38 1 61 8 Total:

Corridor - 2083

22 of 22

Dell™ Optiplex™ 755

advanced remote management: New capabilities that allow it to have greater control

Your choice of flexible options — from ASF 2.0 to intel AMt 3.0, •

and even full intel vpRO processor technology Standards-based management (DASH 1.0 and WS-MAN) help •

ensure simplicity and interoperability Dell Client Manager brings it all together in one management console•

Power efficiency: productivity and power savings in a proven, reliable design

Dell’s unique approach to energy Smart hardware and •

software — including intel® Core™ 2 Duo processors, efficient management power settings, available 80+ power supplies and eNeRGY StAR® 4.0 configurations Dell’s online energy Calculator indicates potential savings of up •

to 78% by choosing the most efficient configurations Dell is working alongside industry leaders and governments •

worldwide to help drive revolutionary change

smart security: Strategic, comprehensive endpoint solutions for all types of businesses

intel vpro technology helps simplify asset inventory, isolation •

of virus-infected pCs, security patch deployment and more RAiD 1 support helps keep data intact and accessible via •

real-time redundancy Built-in tpM 1.2 helps protect the network from unauthorized •

access, while enabling multi-factor authentication via optional Smart Card Reader and/or fingerprint reader

dell dePloyment services: image management, customization and deployment made easy

Specific provisioning and pre-configured setting options for •

iAMt and intel vpRO technology customers imageDirect allows you to create, manage and load your •

custom images to Dell client systems Microsoft• ® Windows Vista® Assessment and Migration options help streamline and optimize your deployment processes

robust mainstream desktoP designed to meet your needs, now and in the future

the new Dell Optiplex 755 offers a compelling, versatile solution that can help you meet evolving business needs with the right technologies and services. thanks to Dell’s innovative approach to scalable remote client management, the Optiplex 755 offers you a choice between several systems-management options. these options allow you to select an approach that’s appropriate for your current infrastructure, while easily scaling to meet future needs. Options include:

Widely installed ASF (Alert Standard Format) standards-based technology, •

which supports basic in- and out-of-band hardware inventory, alerting, and power control intel• ® Active Management technology (intel AMt), which adds encrypted communications to ASF requirements, and also provides remote diagnosis and troubleshooting capabilities intel• ® vpRO™ processor-based technology adds processor-specific security technologies to intel AMt’s functionality

in addition, Dell continues to expand our Deployment Services — now featuring imageDirect, a web-based tool that can enable you to build and apply custom images for current and future systems. And because we know data security is a vital concern, the Optiplex 755 offers optional RAiD 1 support for real-time data- mirroring protection. plus, those who elect for a full vpRO platform can enjoy additional advanced security and remote remediation features.

1. Up to 256MB of system memory may be allocated to support integrated graphics, depending on system memory size and other factors.2. Dual-channel memory requires two each of the same capacity memory DiMMs.3. Your graphics solution may use a portion of your system memory to support graphics depending on your operating system, system memory size and other factors.4. the total amount of usable memory available will be less than 4GB, depending on the actual system configuration. to utilize more than 4GB of memory requires a 64-bit OS.5. this term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 GB/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit ethernet server and network infrastructure is required.6. For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating system and will be less.7. DVD-ROM drives may have write-capable hardware that has been disabled via firmware modifications.8. Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum compatibility.9. Meets the requirements of the eU Directive on the restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances dated January 27, 2003.10. For a copy of our guarantees or limited warranties, please write Dell USA l.p., Attn: Warranties, One Dell Way, Round Rock, tx 78682. For more information, visit www.dell.com/warranty.11. Service may be provided by third-party. technician will be dispatched if necessary following phone-based troubleshooting. Subject to parts availability, geographical restrictions and terms of service contract. Service timing dependent upon

time of day call placed to Dell. U.S. only. Dell, the Dell logo, Optiplex are trademarks of Dell inc. intel, Core, pentium, Celeron and SpeedStep are trademarks or registered trademarks of intel Corporation. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Altiris and Manageability tool Kit are registered trademarks or trademarks of Altiris, inc. Ati Radeon is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, inc. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SiG, inc. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either entities claiming the marks and names of their products. Dell disclaims proprietary interest in the names and marks of others. © Copyright 2007 Dell inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction or distribution in any manner whatsoever without the express written permission of Dell inc. is strictly forbidden. 07DCpG120_0707. A2G

Dell™ Optiplex™ 755 system

Processor type - intel® Core™ 2 Quad - 1066MHz FSB, lGA 775, 8MB l2 cache, intel® Vt, enhanced intel SpeedStep® technology, intel® 64 and execute Disable Bit (Q6xxx series)- intel® Core™ 2 Duo - 1333MHz FSB, lGA 775, 4MB l2 cache, intel® vpro™ technology, intel® Vt, intel® txt, enhanced intel SpeedStep® technology, intel® 64 and execute Disable Bit (e6x50 series)- intel® Core™ 2 Duo - 800MHz FSB, lGA 775, 2MB l2 cache, enhanced intel SpeedStep® technology, intel® 64 and execute Disable Bit (e4000 series)- intel® pentium®- 800MHz FSB, lGA 775, 1MB l2 cache, enhanced intel SpeedStep® technology, intel® 64 and execute Disable Bit (e2000 series)- intel® Celeron®- 800MHz FSB, lGA 775, 512MB l2 cache, intel® 64 and execute Disable Bit

chipset intel® Q35 express Chipset (iCH9DO)

operating systems Dell recommends Microsoft® Windows® xp professional; Microsoft Windows xp Home edition; Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic; Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business; Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate

video intel® Graphics Media Accelerator 31001; DVi Adapter card; 256MB Ati Radeon HD 2400 pRO w/DVi and tV-out; 256MB Ati Radeon HD 2400 xt Dual monitor DVi/VGA via cables, tV-out

memory Up to four DiMM slots (2 in USFF chassis); Non-eCC dual channel2 DDR2 SDRAM3, supporting 512MB to 8GB4 (except on USFF)-Supports 667 MHz up to 8GB4

-Supports 800 MHz up to 8GB4. USFF provides 2 DiMM slots (Max memory of 4GB4)

networking intel® 82566DM Gigabit5 lAN 10/100/1000

standard i/o Ports 9 USB 2.0 (2 front, 6 rear, 1 internal), USFF offers 7 USB 2.0 (2 front, 5 rear), 1 ethernet (RJ45), 1 serial (9-pin) (16550 compatible), 1 parallel (25-hole, bi-directional), 1 VGA out (15-hole), 1 DVi-i out (USFF) 28-hole DVi connector, optional add-in pS2 card with second serial port (not available on USFF), 1 stereo line-in, 1 microphone-in, 1 speakers/line-out, 1 headphone (front), optional add-in external SAtA card with SAtA port (not available on USFF)

hard drive 80GB, 160GB and 250GB6 7200RpM SAtA ii, 3.0GB/s and 80GB4 10K RpM SAtA ii 3.0GB/s

chassis

dimensions (h x w x d) minitower:

16.10" x 7.36" x 17.52" (40.89cm x 18.69cm x 44.50cm)

desktop: 15.65" x 4.59" x 14.25" (39.75cm x 11.66cm x 36.19cm)

small form factor: 12.45" x 3.65" x 13.4" (31.63cm x 9.26cm x 34cm)

ultra small form factor: 10.3" x 3.5" x 9.9" (26.3cm x 8.9cm x 25.28cm)

number of bays 2 internal 3.5" 1 external 3.5" 2 external 5.25"

1 internal 3.5" 1 external 3.5" 1 external 5.25"

1 internal 3.5" 1 external 3.5" (slimline) 1 external 5.25" (slimline)

1 internal hard drive 1 external removeable drive

expansion slots 2 full height pCi 1 full height pCie x16 graphics 1 full height pCie x1

2 low-profile pCi 1 low-profile pCle x16 graphics (Optional riser converts the pCle and pCi to either 1 pCle and 1 pCi or 2 pCi, full height)

1 low-profile pCi 1 low-profile pCle x16 graphics

Power supply Minitower 305W; Desktop 280W; Small Form Factor 275W; Ultra Small Form Factor 220W

PeriPheralsmonitors crt: Dell 17" e773 CRt, analog; Dell 17" e773 CRt, analog; speakers

flat Panel analog: Dell 15" e157Fp Flat panel, analog; Dell 17" e177Fp Flat panel, analog; Dell 17" e178Fp Flat panel, analog; Dell 19" e197Fp Flat panel, analog; Dell 19" e198Fp Flat panel, analog widescreen flat Panel analog: Dell 19" e198WFp Widescreen Flat panel, analog; Dell 20" e207WFp Widescreen Flat panel, analog; Dell 22" e228WFp Widescreen Flat panel, analog ultrasharp digital flat Panel: Dell 17" UltraSharp 1707FpV Flat panel, VA, adjustable stand, VGA/DVi; Dell 19" UltraSharp 1907FpV Flat panel, VA, adjustable stand, VGA/DVi; Dell 17" UltraSharp

keyboard Dell USB keyboard, no hot keys; Dell USB enhanced Multimedia keyboard; Smart Card Reader USB keyboard; Bluetooth® keyboard and mouse

mouse Dell USB two-button and Dell USB optical two-button scroll, Dell USB premium five-button

speakers internal Dell Business audio speaker, Dell A225, Dell A525, AS501 and AS501pA sound bar available with select Fp monitors

storage devicesremoveable media storage devices

Floppy drive, CD-ROM, CD-RW/DVD combo, DVD-ROM7 and DVD+/-RW8

securitysecurity Wave eMBASSY® trust Suite, Chassis loop lock support (with cable locks available), Chassis intrusion switch, Setup/BiOS password, i/O interface Security, Smart Card and Bio-metric read-

ers, intel vpro Circuit Breaker technology, intel® trusted execution technology and Vt-d

systems management hardware management options

No Management (Management Disabled) ASF 2.0 (legacy Systems Management), iAMt 3.0, intel vpRO

dell client manager standard

A no-charge download of a single hardware management console allows you to deploy, manage and troubleshoot Dell client systems across your entire organization. Optional upgrades to Dell Client Manager plus or the Management Suite for Dell Clients available. Altiris® Manageability toolkit™ required to support advanced intel® vpro™ technology features, sold separately

environmental, ergonomics and regulatory, service and suPPortstandards Blue Angel, CeCp, e-star 4.0, tCO 05, Weee, Japan energy law, CeS, Japan Green pC, FeMp, South Korea eco-label, eU RoHS9, China RoHS, epeAt

base service three-Year limited Warranty10 and Next Business Day On-Site Service11 (U.S. Only)

optional service three-Year Same Day Four-Hour On-Site Response Service11, 5 days x 10 hours a daythree-Year Same Day Four-Hour On-Site Response Service11, 7 days x 24 hours a day



Subject : Estimation

1 B.M EIB-LRP-SM/B4-1 1 1 1 17 20 23 28 0 1 1 3 0 0 0 29 27 2 160 2 2

2 EIB-LRP-SM/G1-1 2 2 2 22 26 47 56 1 0 1 6 26 31 4 50 38 12 160 4 4

3 EIB-LRP-SM/G2-1 2 2 2 11 13 43 52 1 1 0 5 38 46 6 42 31 11 160 3 3

4 EIB-LRP-SM/G3-1 2 2 2 29 35 52 62 1 0 0 8 18 22 3 49 42 7 168 3 3

5 EIB-LRP-SM/G4-1 2 2 2 24 29 49 59 0 0 1 7 26 31 4 46 38 8 170 4 4

6 EIB-LRP-SM/G11-1 2 2 2 38 46 43 52 0 1 0 8 18 22 3 57 52 5 170 3 3

7 EIB-LRP-SM/G12-1 2 2 2 19 23 37 44 0 0 1 5 28 34 5 40 32 8 154 3 3

8 EIB-LRP-SM/G13-1 3 3 3 51 61 61 73 2 0 0 11 22 26 4 68 63 5 232 4 4

9 EIB-LRP-SM/G14-1 2 2 2 30 36 34 41 0 0 1 6 8 10 2 40 39 1 142 3 3

10 EIB-LRP-SM/21-1 2 2 2 29 35 32 38 1 0 0 6 10 12 2 40 39 1 136 3 3

11 EIB-LRP-SM/22-1 2 2 2 28 34 30 36 0 0 0 6 8 10 2 37 36 1 134 3 3

12 EIB-LRP-SM/23-1 2 2 2 30 36 35 42 0 0 1 6 10 12 2 40 39 1 142 3 3

13 EIB-LRP-SM/24-1 2 2 2 29 35 32 38 1 0 0 6 8 10 2 39 38 1 136 3 3

30 30 29 1 2 1 26 1 200 357 428 518 622 7 3 6 83 220 264 39 577 514 63 1 10 2064 41 41

Min

i-Cen

ter 4

8

Mo

du

le

Min

i-Cen

ter 8

0

Mo

du

le

Enclosure

Total

Number

of

ModulesT

ou

ch

Scre

en

EIB

Brig

htn

ess

Sen

so

r

Bu

s C

on

nectio

n

Term

inal

Total

Lighting

Circuits

(Normal)

Total with

20% Spare

Including

Normal

Total

Shutter

Circuits

Power

Supply

SUS/30.6

40.1

101

Ap

plic

atio

n U

nit

Lo

gic

1 2 26 1

Bu

s C

ou

ple

r

Lin

e C

ou

ple

r LK

/S 4

.1

8 fo

ld S

witc

hin

g

Devic

es (S

A/S

8.1

6.1

)

Total :

Batte

ry M

od

ule

, AM

/S

GF

1st F

2nd F

S.N.

Lo

catio

n

EIB Panel Name

EIB Decives EIB Decives

2 fo

ld S

witc

hin

g

Devic

es (S

A/S

2.1

6.1

)

12 fo

ld S

witc

hin

g

Devic

es (S

A/S

12.1

6.1

)

Lighting Circuits

US

B In

terfa

ce U

SB

3.1

4 fo

ld S

witc

hin

g

Devic

es (S

A/S

4.1

6.1

)

IP R

ou

ter

NT

/S 1

2.1

600

Ap

plic

atio

n U

nit T

ime

EIB Decives

200

Shutter Circuits

Total

with 20%

Spare

8 fold

Shutter

Devices

JA/S

8.230.1

Pre

sen

ce D

ete

cto

r

Mu

lti-fun

ctio

n S

witc

h

Sen

so

rs 4

-fold

Total

Lighting

Circuits

(Emergency)

Total with

20% Spare

Including

(Emergency)

1

General Information

1- All circuit details, EIB network layout drawing and the single line diagram submitted along with this submittal are based on approved shop drawings of lighting and power.

2- Along with the submittal we attached one LRP panel shop drawings for approval and LRP sample will be submitted to the site consultant for approval.

3- We considered your approval on the materials submitted to you in the following references: - MAT-P1-EL-1304-01

- MAT-P1-EL-1306-02 as approval for all buildings and we attached all approved materials data sheet in separate column.

ABB i-bus® EIB

HS/S 3.1HS/S 3.1

7 7

Brightness sensor, 3-channel, MDRCHS/S 3.1, GH Q605 0063 R0001

Page 1 of 8HSS_31_TD_EN_V1-12CDC 507 026 D0201

The brightness sensor can sendswitching telegrams to EIB actuatorswhen the brightness exceeds or fallsbelow a specified threshold.

Three different threshold valuesbetween 1 .... 20,000 lux can be setvia the ETS2 program.

The brightness sensor is a DIN railmounted device for insertion in thedistribution board. The connection tothe EIB is established via a busconnecting terminal.

The supplied light sensor forrecording the ambient brightnesslevel is mounted on the outside of thebuilding and connected via two screwterminals.

S 0

060

B00

.tif

Technical Data

Power supply – EIB 24 V DC, via the bus lineInputs – Brightness ranges 1 … 100 lux

100 … 20,000 luxcan be selected via software

– Cable length max. 100 mOperating and display elements – Red LED and push button for assigning the

physical addressConnections – Light sensor 2 screw terminals

Wire range 0.5 … 2 mm2

– EIB Pins for bus connecting terminalType of protection – Control unit IP 20, EN 60 529

– Light sensor IP 54, EN 60 529Ambient temperature range – Operation of control unit - 5 °C … 45 °C

– Operation of light sensor -40 °C … 70 °C– Storage -25 °C … 55 °C– Transport -25 °C … 70 °C

Design – Modular installation device, proMHousing, colour – Plastic housing, greyMounting – Control unit on 35 mm mounting rail,

DIN EN 50022– Light sensor with mounting bracket on

vertical surfaceDimensions – Control unit 86 x 36 x 64 mm (H x W x D)

– Light sensor 74 / 118 x 27 x 36 / 62 mm (H x W x D)Mounting depth/width – Control unit 68 mm / 2 modules at 18 mmWeight – Control unit 0.180 kg

– Light sensor 0.04 kgCertification – EIB-certifiedCE norm – in accordance with the EMC guideline

and the low voltage guidelineSpecial features – Inputs 1, for light sensor

ABB i-bus® EIB

HS/S 3.1HS/S 3.1

7 7



Note The light sensor is fixed with amounting bracket as supplied to avertical surface. The intake for thesignal cable must point downwards.When selecting the installation site,you should note the following:

The maximum cable length is 100 m.A conventional, two-core cable can beused.

Make sure that the light sensor is notin shadow. If the brightness sensorshould be used for switching externallighting, the light sensor should faceeastwards. If it is to be used for roomlighting, it should preferably facenorthwards.

Application programs Number of Max. number of Max. number ofcommunication objects group addresses associations

Switch Steps Cyclic 4 5 5Switch Steps Value Cyclic 5 5 5

Circuit diagram

1 Programming LED and push button 3 Connection for light sensor2 Bus connection

ABB i-bus® EIB

HS/S 3.1HS/S 3.1

7 7



Switch Steps Cyclic

Selection in ETS2

– ABBPhys. Sensors

Brightness

If the current measured valuefluctuates by the set threshold value, itcan result in frequent switchingoperations. It is possible to set acommon hysteresis for all thechannels to prevent this fromhappening.

The percentage value for thishysteresis refers to the resistancevalue of the light sensor, whereby theresolution of the brightness sensormust be taken into consideration.

The resolution of the light sensor is400 Ohm in a range between1.2 kOhm and 50 kOhm (correspondsto 20000 lux to 100 lux). It is set at20 kOhm in a range between50 kOhm and 2.5 MOhm (correspondsto 100 lux to 1 lux).

The following example serves toclarify the setting of the hysteresis:At a threshold value of 10 kOhm(corresponds to approx. 700 lux), thebrightness sensor detects at approx.10.4 kOhm that it has become darker.If the hysteresis is set at 12.5%, itshould detect at approx. 8.75 kOhmthat it is lighter. With a resolution of400 Ohm, the actual threshold lies at8.4 kOhm. This corresponds to approx.1000 lux.

Channel selection

The three threshold value objects canbe disabled individually or togethervia object no. 3. The three leastsignificant bits of the 1 bytecommunication object are evaluatedindividually.

If a channel is disabled, thecommunication object is no longerpermitted to send any telegrams. If thechannel is enabled, thecommunication object sends atelegram with its current value.

��

�

Switch

The brightness sensor has three 1 bitcommunication objects which cansend “On” or “Off” switching telegramswhen the brightness value exceeds orfalls below the respective thresholdvalue. It is possible to defineseparately for an overrange orundershoot of the respectivethreshold, whether the communicationobject should send cyclically. Acommon cyclic time is set for all thechannels.

Threshold value

The three threshold values can be setindependently in the parameters asresistance values of the light sensors.

Depending on the tolerance of thelight sensor, it may be necessary tocorrect the resistance value that wasoriginally selected. The following tablehelps in this regard:

Illuminance Resistance / Ohm/ lux

approx. 1 2.4 M approx. 1.5 2.0 M

approx. 2 1.5 Mapprox. 3 1.0 Mapprox. 5 700.0 kapprox. 7 460.0 kapprox. 10 340.0 kapprox. 20 200.0 kapprox. 30 140.0 kapprox. 50 100.0 kapprox. 200 30.0 kapprox. 300 19.6 kapprox. 500 12.8 kapprox. 700 10.4 kapprox. 1000 8.4 kapprox. 1500 6.0 kapprox. 2000 5.2 kapprox. 2500 4.0 kapprox. 5000 2.8 kapprox. 7000 2.4 kapprox. 10000 2.0 k

ABB i-bus® EIB

HS/S 3.1HS/S 3.1

7 7



The following table lists the valuesthat must be sent to object no. 3 inorder to disable and/or enablespecific objects.

Dec. Binary Ch.3 Ch.2 Ch.1

0 0000 0000 enab. enab. enab.1 0000 0001 enab. enab. disab.2 0000 0010 enab. disab. enab.3 0000 0011 enab. disab. disab.4 0000 0100 disab. enab. enab.5 0000 0101 disab. enab. disab.6 0000 0110 disab. block. enab.7 0000 0111 disab. disab. disab.

If channels 3 and 1 should be enabledand channel 2 should be disabled,telegram 0000 0010 must be sent toobject no. 3. This corresponds to thedecimal value 2. This value can besent e.g. using ETS or by a logicmodule.

To prevent the light from beingcontinually switched in the event oftemporary fluctuations, it is possible todefine a common delay time for all thechannels. The brightness must exceedor fall below the set threshold for thisdelay time before the brightnesssensor may send a telegram. Thissetting applies for all the channels.

Communication objects

ParametersThe default setting for the valuesis printed in bold type.

No. Type Object name Function0 1 bit Threshold channel 1 Telegr. switch1 1 bit Threshold channel 2 Telegr. switch2 1 bit Threshold channel 3 Telegr. switch3 1 byte Input telegr. Disable channels 1-3

General:– Interval for cyclical sending approx. 3 min / approx. 5 min /

approx. 10 min /… / approx. 60 min– Hysteresis of threshold values 1…3 approx. 25 % / approx. 12.5 % /

approx. 6 %– Delay time when brightness approx. 10 sec. / approx. 20 sec. / … /

exceeds/falls below threshold approx. 60 sec. / … / approx. 3 min

Separate for channel 1 … channel 3:– Threshold value 2.0 kOhm, approx. 10000 lux

2.4 kOhm, approx. 7000 lux…200 kOhm, approx. 20 lux…2.4 MOhm, approx. 1 lux

– When brightness falls below threshold no telegramvalue (-> darker), channel … sends OFF telegram once

ON telegram onceOFF telegrams cyclicallyON telegrams cyclically

– When brightness exceeds threshold no telegramvalue (-> brighter), channel … sends OFF telegram once

ON telegram onceOFF telegrams cyclicallyON telegrams cyclically

Behaviour of channels when disabled:– When disabled, channels 1...3 no telegram

send– When enabled, channels 1...3 current value immediately

send– Further information about disabling/

enabling channels 1…3 can be foundin the ETS application description

ABB i-bus® EIB

HS/S 3.1HS/S 3.1

7 7



Switch Steps Value Cyclic

Selection in ETS2


Brightness

��

�

If the current measured valuefluctuates by the set threshold value, itcan result in frequent switchingoperations. It is possible to set acommon hysteresis for all thechannels to prevent this fromhappening.

The percentage value for thishysteresis refers to the resistancevalue of the light sensor, whereby theresolution of the brightness sensormust be taken into consideration.

The resolution of the light sensor is400 Ohm in a range between1.2 kOhm and 50 kOhm (correspondsto 20000 lux to 100 lux). It is set at20 kOhm in a range between50 kOhm and 2.5 MOhm (correspondsto 100 lux to 1 lux).

The following example serves toclarify the setting of the hysteresis:At a threshold value of 10 kOhm(corresponds to approx. 700 lux), thebrightness sensor detects at approx.10.4 kOhm that it has become darker.If the hysteresis is set at 12.5%, itshould detect at approx. 8.75 kOhmthat it is lighter. With a resolution of400 Ohm, the actual threshold lies at8.4 kOhm. This corresponds to approx.1000 lux.

To prevent the light from beingcontinually switched in the event oftemporary fluctuations, it is possible todefine a common delay time for all thechannels. The value must exceed orfall below the set threshold for thisdelay time before the brightnesssensor may send a telegram. Thissetting applies for all the channels.

Cyclic

A common setting is selected for allthe outputs to determine whether theyshould send cyclically or only whenchanging scenes. The cyclic time canbe set between 2.5 minutes and60 minutes.

Scene

Using this application program, thebrightness sensor can implementlightscene control with fourbrightness-dependent scenes. Eachscene consists of three 1 bitcommunication objects and a 1 bytecommunication object. The fourlightscenes are differentiated fromeach other by the three thresholdvalues.

Threshold value

The brightness sensor has a commonparameter “Measuring range” todefine the threshold values. The twomeasuring ranges100 - 20000 lux (50 kOhm … 1 kOhm)and1 - 100 lux (2.5 MOhm … 50 kOhm)can be selected. There is a parameterfor each of the three threshold valuesof “light”, “medium” and “dark”. Thethree values must be used inascending order. Increased resistancevalues mean reduced illuminancelevels due to the characteristic curveof the sensor.

Depending on the tolerance of thelight sensor, it may be necessary tocorrect the resistance value that wasoriginally selected. The following tablehelps in this regard:

Illuminance Resistance / Ohm/ lux

approx. 1 2.4 M approx. 1.5 2.0 M

approx. 2 1.5 Mapprox. 3 1.0 Mapprox. 5 700.0 kapprox. 7 460.0 kapprox. 10 340.0 kapprox. 20 200.0 kapprox. 30 140.0 kapprox. 50 100.0 kapprox. 200 30.0 kapprox. 300 19.6 kapprox. 500 12.8 kapprox. 700 10.4 kapprox. 1000 8.4 kapprox. 1500 6.0 kapprox. 2000 5.2 kapprox. 2500 4.0 kapprox. 5000 2.8 kapprox. 7000 2.4 kapprox. 10000 2.0 kapprox. 20000 1.0 k

ABB i-bus® EIB

HS/S 3.1HS/S 3.1

7 7



Switch

For the four scenes “Brighter thanthreshold 1”, “Between threshold 1and 2”, “Between threshold 2 and 3”and “Darker than threshold 3”, it ispossible to set separately for the 1 bitcommunication objects whether theyshould send telegrams. The value ofthe communication object is set withthe following parameter anddetermines when the output shouldsend a telegram.

Value

In the same way as for the 1 bitcommunication objects, it is alsopossible to select for the 1 bytecommunication object of output 1when it should send a telegram andwhich value it should use.

Channel selection

The four communication objects forthe outputs can be disabledindividually or together via object no.4. The four least significant bits of the1 byte communication object areevaluated individually.

If an output is disabled, thecommunication object is no longerpermitted to send any telegrams. If thechannel is enabled, thecommunication object sends atelegram with its current value.

The table below lists the values thatmust be sent to object no. 4 in order todisable and/or enable specificchannels.

If e.g. channels 3 and 1 should beenabled and channels 2 and 4 shouldbe disabled, telegram 0000 0101must be sent to object no. 4.

This corresponds to the decimal value5. This value can be sent e.g. usingETS or by a logic module.

Dec. Binary Ch.4 Ch.3 Ch.2 Ch.1

0 0000 0000 enab. enab. enab. enab.1 0000 0001 disab. enab. enab. enab.2 0000 0010 enab. enab. enab. disab.3 0000 0011 disab. enab. enab. disab.4 0000 0100 enab. enab. disab. enab.5 0000 0101 disab. enab. disab. enab.6 0000 0110 enab. enab. disab. disab.7 0000 0111 disab. enab. disab. disab.8 0000 1000 enab. disab. enab. enab.9 0000 1001 disab. disab. enab. enab.

10 0000 1010 enab. disab. enab. disab.11 0000 1011 disab. disab. enab. disab.12 0000 1100 enab. disab. disab. enab.13 0000 1101 disab. disab. disab. enab..14 0000 1110 enab.. disab. disab. disab.15 0000 1111 disab. disab. disab. disab.

ABB i-bus® EIB

HS/S 3.1HS/S 3.1

7 7





No. Type Object name Function0 1 byte Output 1 Telegr. value1 1 bit Output 2 Telegr. switch2 1 bit Output 3 Telegr. switch3 1 bit Output 4 Telegr. switch4 1 byte Input telegr. Positive operation

General:– Cyclical sending yes

noOnly if “yes” is selected:– Interval for cyclical sending approx. 3 min / approx. 5 min /

approx. 10 min / … / approx. 60 minThreshold values:– Measuring range 100 - 20000 lux

(approx. 50 kOhm…1 kOhm)1 - 100 lux(approx. 2.5 MOhm…50 kOhm)

Only for measuring range 100-20000 lux:– Threshold 1 (light) 1 kOhm (approx. 20000 lux)

1.2 kOhm…2 kOhm (approx. 10000 lux)…50 kOhm (approx. 100 lux)not activated

– Threshold 2 (medium) 1 kOhm (approx. 20000 lux)1.2 kOhm…8.4 kOhm (approx. 1000 lux)…50 kOhm (approx. 100 lux)not activated

– Threshold 3 (dark) 1 kOhm (approx. 20000 lux)1.2 kOhm…28 kOhm (approx. 200 lux)…50 kOhm (approx. 100 lux)not activated

Only for measuring range 1-100 lux:– Threshold 1 (light) 50 kOhm (approx. 100 lux)

60 kOhm…2.50 MOhmnot activated

– Threshold 2 (medium) 50 kOhm (approx. 100 lux)60 kOhm…90 kOhm (approx. 50lux)…2.50 MOhmnot activated

– Threshold 3 (dark) 50 kOhm (approx. 100 lux)60 kOhm…130 kOhm (approx. 30 lux)…2.50 MOhmnot activated

– Hysteresis of threshold values 1…3 approx. 25 % / approx. 12.5 % /approx. 6 %

ABB i-bus® EIB

HS/S 3.1HS/S 3.1

7 7



– Delay time when brightness approx. 20 sec. / approx. 30 sec. /exceeds/falls below threshold … / approx. 4 min

Separate for the 4 brightness ranges:– Channel 1 (switching) sends no telegram

following telegramOnly if telegram is sent:– ON

OFF– Channel 2 (switching) sends no telegram


OFF– Channel 3 (switching) sends no telegram


OFF– Channel 4 (value) sends no telegram

following telegramOnly if telegram is sent:– Value (0…255) 0

Behaviour of channels 1…3 when disabled:– Channel … (switch) sends no telegram

following telegram onceOnly if telegram is sent:– ON

OFFBehaviour of channel 4 when disabled:

– Channel … (value) sends no telegramfollowing telegram once

Only if telegram is sent:– Value (0…255) 0

– Further information about disabling/enabling channels 1...3 can be foundin the ETS application description

ABB i-bus® KNX

IPR/S 2.1IPR/S 2.1

22

Page 1 of 4IPRS_21_TD_EN_V2-02CDC 502 047 D0202

IP Router, MDRCIPR/S 2.1, 2CDG 110 061 R0011

The IP Router 2.1 is a modular instal-lation device (MDRC) and forms the interface between KNX installations and IP networks. It can be used as a fast line and area coupler and can utilise the local network (LAN) for fast exchange of telegrams between the lines/areas.

KNX devices can be programmed via the LAN using ETS 3.0. The device uses the KNXnet/IP protocol from the KNX Association (Routing and Tunnelling).

2CD

C 0

71 0

45 F

0007

The IP address can be fixed or can be received from a DHCP server.

The power supply range is from 10 to 30 V DC.

Technical data

Supply Supply voltage Us

Power consumption

Current consumption

Leakage loss

Rated voltage Un

Rated current InCurrent consumption KNX

10…30 V DC via plug-in terminalRipple: < 5 %

Maximum 1.9 W at 10 V

Maximum 190 mA at 10 V

Maximum 1.9 W at 10 V

12 V DC

145 mA at 12 V

From KNX < 10 mA

Connections KNX

Plug-in terminal for operating voltage

LAN

Bus connection terminal

Plug-in terminal

RJ45 socket for 10/100BaseT, IEEE 802.3 networks, AutoSensing

Operating and display elements LED red and button

LED green

LED yellow

For assignment of the physical address

Operating mode display

Network connection indicator

KNX telegram traffic indicator

Enclosure IP 20 To DIN EN 60529

Safety class II To DIN EN 61140

Isolation category Overvoltage category

Pollution degree

III to DIN EN 60664-1

2 to DIN EN 60664-1

KNX safety extra low voltage SELV 24 V DC

Temperature range Operation

Storage

Transport

0 °C…+45 °C

-25 °C…+55 °C

-25 °C…+70 °C

Ambient conditions Maximum air humidity 93 %, no condensation allowed

Design Modular installation device (MDRC)

Dimensions

Mounting width

Mounting depth

Modular installation device, ProM

90 x 36 x 64 mm (H x W x D)

2 modules at 18 mm

68 mm

Installation On 35 mm mounting rail To DIN EN 60 715

ABB i-bus® KNX

IPR/S 2.1 IPR/S 2.1

2 2



Note

For a detailed description of the application program see “IP Router IPR/S 2.1” product manual. It is available free-of-charge at www.ABB.de/KNX.

The programming requires EIB Software Tool ETS3 V3.0e or higher. If ETS3 is used a *.VD3 or higher type file must be imported. The application program is available in the ETS3 at ABB/System devices/Routing.

The device does not support the closing function of a project or the KNX device in the ETS. If you inhibit access to all devices of the project with a BCU code (ETS3), it has no effect on this device. Data can still be read and programmed.

Mounting position as required

Weight 0.100 kg

Housing, colour Plastic housing, grey

Approvals KNX to EN 50 090-1, -2

CE mark In accordance with the EMC guideline and low voltage guideline

Application program Maximum number of


Maximum number of

group addresses

Maximum number of

associations

Routing 0 0 0

ABB i-bus® KNX

IPR/S 2.1IPR/S 2.1

22



Circuit diagram

1 LED ON2 LED LAN/LINK3 LED telegram4 Supply voltage connection5 KNX connection

6 Programming LED7 Programming button8 Label carrier9 LAN connection

2CD

C 0

72 1

86 F

0007

Dimension drawing

2CD

C 0

71 1

12 F

0008

ABB i-bus® KNX

IPR/S 2.1 IPR/S 2.1

2 2



Notes

Page 1 of 22JAS_82301_TD_EN_V2-0

2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1

Shutter Actuator, 8-fold, 230 V AC, MDRCJA/S 8.230.1, GH Q631 0063 R0111

7 7

For controlling a maximum of eight independent 230 V AC shutter or sun-blind drives via ABB i-bus® including the functions Up/Down, Step/Stop, Move to position, Sun protection automatic control and Heating/cooling automatic control.

The output contacts for the direc-tions UP and DOWN are mechanically interlocked so that voltage cannot be applied at both contacts at the same time. The pause on change in direction can be set via the parameters.

Technical data

Power supply – Operating voltage 21...30 V DC, via the EIB – Current input typ. 10 mA – Power consumption via EIB < 250 mWOutputs – Number of outputs 8 independent outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (UP/DOWN mechanically interlocked) – Nominal voltage 230 V AC – Max. switching current 6 A (AC1/AC3) at 230 V AC or 6 A (AC1/AC3) at 400 V AC – Min. switching current 100 mA at 5 V or 10 mA at 10 V or 1 mA at 24 VOperating and display elements – Red LED and push button for entering the physical addressConnections – Load circuits 4 screw terminals for phase connection (e.g. L1 and L2) 2 screw terminals per output for UP and DOWN Wire range: fi nely-stranded: 0.2 – 2.5 mm2

single-core: 0.2 – 4.0 mm2

– EIB Bus connection terminal (black/red)Type of protection – IP 20, EN 60 529Ambient temperature range – Operation – 5 °C ... + 45 °C – Storage – 25 °C ... + 55 °C – Transport – 25 °C ... + 70 °CDesign – Modular installation device, proMHousing, colour – Plastic housing, greyMounting – on 35 mm mounting rail, DIN EN 50 022Dimensions – 90 x 144 x 64 mm (H x W x D)Mounting depth/width – 68 mm/8 modules at 18 mmWeight – 0.5 kgMounting position – as requiredCertifi cation – EIB- and KNX-certifi edCE norm – in accordance with the EMC guideline and the low voltage guideline

The Shutter Actuator is for DIN rail mounting. It is connected to the ABB i-bus® EIB via a Bus connection terminal.

2CD

C 0

71 2

38 F

0003


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

Application programs

Max. number of Max. number of Max. number of

communication objects group addresses associations

Shutter, 8f/1 237 254 254

Wiring diagram “Shutter” and “Blinds” operating

modes

“Ventilation fl aps” operating mode

1 Programming LED, push button 3 Connection terminals2 Marker Tag 4 Bus terminal

Dimension drawing

M M M M M M M M

C7 8 9 10

D6

Lµ

L

PEN

3

1

4

2

A2 3 4 5

B1

Lµ

JA/S 8.230.1

6 A 230 V AC

E12 13 14 15

F11

Lµ

G17 18 19 20

H16

Lµ

ABB i-bus®EIB®

C7 8 9 10

D6

Lµ

L3

PEN

3

1

4

2

A2 3 4 5

B1

Lµ

JA/S 8.230.1

6 A 230 V AC

E12 13 14 15

F11

Lµ

G17 18 19 20

H16

Lµ

L2L1

M M M M M M M M

ABB i-bus®EIB®

45

58

43.5 6.5

90

144

JA/S 8.230.1

A2 3 4 5

B1

Lµ

C7 8 9 10

D6

Lµ

E12 13 14 15

F11

Lµ

G17 18 19 20

H16

Lµ

6 A 230 V ACABB i-bus®EIB®


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

The programming is carried out with ETS from version ETS2 V1.2a onwards.

ETS3 note:For programming the device with the help of the ETS3, the relevant VD3 fi le must be applied.

To guarantee all the programmable functions, in particular the UP/DOWN directions of travel, it is important to ensure that the drive has been connected properly. The technical data supplied by the drive manu-facturer must be taken into account!

If the outputs are switched several times in rapid succession, the switching of the output contacts is delayed.The following process should be car-ried out during the initial commissio-ning of the shutter actuator:1. Install and wire up the shutter

actuator.2. First connect the EIB voltage.

The output contacts automatically adopt the neutral position.

3. Only then connect the 230 V AC operating voltage for the shutter outputs.

Note If the preselected parameter settings have been modifi ed during programming, the output contacts adoptthe

specifi ed position on bus voltage recovery once the EIB voltage has been connected.

The function “ventilation fl aps/switch mode” may be inverted by connecting the load to the “Down” terminal instead of the “Up” terminal (e.g. terminal “2” instead of terminal “3”).

Depending on the position of the output contact, also the non-connected terminals are under voltage!

The Shutter Actuator is supplied with a downloaded application program. It is therefore only necessary to download the group addresses and parameters during commissioning. The complete application program can also be downloaded if required.


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

�

Communication objects in the

operating modes

– “Shutter” and

– “Blinds”

“Direct” communication objects

Move shutter Up-Down

Move blinds Up-Down

If a telegram with the value “0” is received at this communication object, the shutter/blind is raised. If a telegram with the value “1” is received, the shut-ter/blind is lowered. The output contact reverts to the neutral position once the total travel time has elapsed.

Telegram value: “0”: UP “1”: DOWN

Louvre adj. /Stop Up-Down

Stop Up-Down

If the shutter/blind is in motion, the movement is stopped on receipt of a telegram at this communication object, regardless of whether a “0” or a “1” is received.

“Blinds” operating mode: If the shutter is idle, it is raised (“0”) or lowered (“1”) for the duration of the louvre adjust-ment and then stopped on receipt of a telegram at this object.

“Shutter” operating mode: If the blind is idle, no action is carried out on receipt of a telegram at this communication object.

Telegram value: “0”: Stop/louvre adj. UP “1”: Stop/louvre adj. DOWN

Move to position 0...255

If a telegram is received at this com-munication object, the shutter/blind moves to the corresponding position for the received value.

Telegram value: “0”: Top “...”: Intermediate position “255”: Bottom

After reaching the target position, the louvres are positioned as before. Only if during the shutter/blind movement a telegram was received on the com-mu-nication object “Move louvres 0…255”, the louvres will be positioned accord-ingly.

Move louvres 0...255

If a telegram is received at this commu-nication object, the louvres are positio-ned according to the received value. If the shutter/blind is already in motion, it is fi rst moved to the target position and then the positioning of the louvres is carried out.

Telegram value: “0”: Louvres opened to maximum “...”: Intermediate position “255”: Louvres closed to maximum

Move to position 1/2

Move to position 3/4

If a telegram is received at this com-munication object, the shutter/blind is moved to the stored preset position. In the “Blinds” operating mode, the louvre adjustment is carried out according to the preset position once the position has been reached.

If a telegram with the value “0” is received, the shutter/blind moves to position 1 (or position 3). If a telegram with the value “1” is received, the shut-ter/blind is moved to position 2 (or position 4).

Telegram value: “0”: Move to position 1 or Move to position 3 “1”: Move to position 2 or Move to position 4

Set position 1/2

Set position 3/4

If a telegram is received at this commu-nication object, the current position of the shutter/blind is adopted as the new preset value.

If a telegram with the value “0” is recei-ved, the current position is stored as the new preset value for position 1 (or position 3). If a telegram with the value “1” is received, the current position is stored as the new preset value for position 2 (or position 4). If position 1 or 2 is now recalled (posi-tion 3 or 4), the shutter/blind moves to the new preset values.

The modifi ed preset values are retained on bus voltage failure. After program-ming the shutter actuator, the preset values are reset to the values that were parameterised during the project design stage or the values adapted in operation are stored, depending on parameterization.

Shutter, 8f/1

Selection in ETS2

– ABB – Shutter – Switch

8


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

Telegram value: “0”: Set position 1 or Set position 3 “1”: Set position 2 or Set position 4

Shutter Up-Down limited

Blinds Up-Down limited

If a telegram with the value “0” is received at this communication object, the shutter/blind is raised. If a telegram with the value “1” is received, the shut-ter/blind is lowered. The shutter/blind is stopped if the Upper limit or the Lower limit of the travelling range is reached.

If telegrams are received on the com-munication object ”Louvre adj./Stop Up-Down”, the shutter/blind can be moved in steps external to the set limits.

If the shutter/blind is positioned in a higher position than the upper limit, no reaction will be carried out after a telegram with the value “0” and it is moved down after a telegram with the value “1”. If the shutter/blind is positioned in a lower position than the downer limit, no reaction will be carried out after a telegram with the value “1” and it is moved up after a telegram with the value “0”.

If the shutter actuator has not car-ried out a reference movement after programming, bus reset or bus voltage recovery, the shutter/blind is moved completely up or down when receiv-ing a telegram on this communication object. It is not stopped at the upper or lower limit in this case.

Telegram value: “0”: UP “1”: DOWN

Reference movement

If a telegram is received at this com-munication object, all the shutters/blinds which have the following settings are fully raised or fully lowe-red:

– the option “deactivated” has not been set for Position after reference movement

– the option “Ventilation fl aps/switch mode” has not been set as the Ope-rating mode

– no safety function has been activa-ted and

– manual operation has not been activated.

The saved position is updated and the shutter/blind is moved into the set Position after reference movement. If the option “back to saved position” has been selected and automatic control was activated for the shutter/blind prior to the reference movement, automatic control is reactivated once the saved position has been reached.

Telegram value: “0”: Reference movement right to the top “1”: Reference movement right to the bottom

Scene

Each output can be integrated into up to ten scenes with this communication object. A telegram is received which contains the number of the scene that is addressed together with the information about whether the shutter/blind is moved to the last saved position or whether the current position should be stored as the new preset value.

The stored scene values are retained in the event of a bus voltage failure and if only the parameters are downloaded during programming. If the complete application is downloaded again during programming, the scene value is reset to the position “right at the top”.

Telegram code: MXNNNNNN NNNNNN: 0...63: Scene number X: free (contains no information) M: “0”: Recall scene “1”: Store scene

“Automatic” communication

objects

Activation of automatic control

If a telegram with the value “1” is received at this communication object, automatic control is activated for the corresponding output. The output is controlled via the “automatic” commu-nication objects: “Sun”, “Presence”, “Heating” and “Cooling” as well as “Move to position for sun 0...255” and “Adjust louvres for sun 0...255”.

If a telegram with the value “0” is re-ceived, the shutter/blind remains in the current position and no longer reacts to incoming telegrams at the “automatic” communication objects. If the shutter is in the process of carrying out an automatic movement command, the action is carried out.


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

Telegram value: “0”: Automatic control deactivated “1”: Automatic control activated

Sun

Incoming telegrams at this commu-nication object are only taken into account if the communication object “Activation of automatic control” has the value “1”.

If a telegram with the value “1” is received at the communication object “Sun”, the shutter/blind moves to the set Position for sun = “1”. If a telegram with the value “0” is received, the shutter/blind moves to the set Position for sun = “0”.

The reaction to an incoming telegram can be carried out with a time delay via the parameters Delay for sun = “1” and Delay for sun = “0” so that the shut-ter/blind is not continually raised and lowered when there are frequent chan-ges in the weather. If a telegram with the opposite value is received within the delay period, the shutter/blind does not move to the Position for sun = “1” and remains in the Position for sun = “0” or vice versa.

If the option “receive position via 8 bit value” has been set for the parame-ter Position for sun = “1”, the output moves once the delay period has elapsed to the position that was last received at the communication objects “Move to position for sun 0...255” (“Shutter” and “Blinds” operating modes) and “Adjust louvres for sun 0...255” (“Blinds” operating mode only).

Telegram value: “0”: No sun “1”: Sun

Move to position for sun 0...255

Incoming telegrams at this commu-nication object are only executed if automatic control has been activated (“Activation of automatic control”= “1”) and the sun is shining (“Sun” = “1”). The shutter/blind is then positioned according to the received value.

After reaching the target position, the louvres are positioned as before. Only if during the shutter/blind movement a telegram was received on the commu-nication object “Adjust louvres for sun 0…255”, the louvres will be positioned accordingly.


Adjust louvres for sun 0...255

Incoming telegrams at this commu-nication object are only executed if automatic control has been activated (“Activation of automatic control”= “1”) and the sun is shining (“Sun” = “1”). The louvres are then positioned accor-ding to the received value.

The movement command “Move to position for sun 0...255” is always exe-cuted fi rst. Once the target position is reached, the positioning of the louvres is carried out.

Telegram value: “0”: Louvres opened to maximum “...”: Intermediate position “255”: Louvres closed to maximum

Presence

Incoming telegrams at this commu-nication object are only taken into account if the communication object “Activation of automatic control” has the value “1”.

Using the communication object “Pre-sence”, it is possible to toggle between automatic sun protection and auto-matic heating/cooling. If a telegram with the value “1” is received at the object “Presence”, the shutter/blind is only controlled via the communication object “Sun” (automatic sun protec-tion). If a telegram with the value “0” is received, the shutter/blind is controlled via the communication objects “Sun”, “Heating” and “Cooling” (automatic heating/cooling).

The reaction to an incoming telegram can be carried out with a time delay via the parameters Delay for presence = “1” and Delay for presence = “0”. If a telegram with the opposite value is received within the delay period, the period is restarted. If a telegram with the same value is received, the delay period is not restarted. The shutter/blind moves to the target position once the delay has elapsed.

Telegram value: “0”: No-one is present ( automatic heating/cooling) “1”: Someone is present ( automatic sun protection)


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

Heating

Cooling

Incoming telegrams at these commu-nication objects are only taken into account if the communication object “Activation of automatic control” has the value “1” and the communication object “Presence” has the value “0”.

If a telegram with the value “1” is received at the communication object “Heating”, the output moves to the set Position for heating = “1” and sun = “1” or Position for heating = “1” and sun = “0”.

If a telegram with the value “1” is received at the communication object “Cooling”, the output moves to the set Position for cooling = “1” and sun = “1” or Position for cooling = “1” and sun = “0”.

If a “0” or a “1” is received at both communication objects, the automatic heating/cooling mode is deactivated and the output is controlled via the automatic sun protection.

Telegram value: “0”: No heating/no cooling “1”: Heating/cooling

Enable/disable automatic control

If a telegram with the value “1” is received at this communication object, automatic control is automatically deactivated and the output can only be controlled via the “direct” commu-nica-tion objects. Automatic control can no longer be activated via the communication object “Activation of automatic control”.

If a telegram with the value “0” is received at this communication object, automatic control can be reactivated for the corresponding output.

Telegram value: “0”: Automatic control enabled “1”: Automatic control disabled

Enable/block direct operation

If a telegram with the value “1” is received at this communication object, the output switches automatically from direct operation to automatic control. Automatic control can no longer be deactivated via the communication object “Activation of automatic control” or the “direct” communication objects.

Incoming telegrams at the direct com-munication objects are not executed.

If a telegram with the value “0” is received at this communication object, automatic control can be deactivated again for the corresponding output.

Telegram value: “0”: Direct operation enabled “1”: Direct operation blocked

“Safety” communication objects

Wind alarm no. X

Rain alarm

Frost alarm

These communication objects expect cyclical telegrams. If a telegram with the value “0” is received within the mo-nitoring period, the associated outputs can be controlled via the “direct” and “automatic” communication objects.

If no telegrams or a telegram with the value “1” are received during the monitoring period, the shutters/blinds are moved to the set Position for wind alarm (for rain alarm or frost alarm). Operation via the “direct” and “au-tomatic” communication objects is disabled.

If a telegram with the value “0” is received again for the fi rst time after a weather alarm or once the monitoring period has been exceeded, the shut-ters/blinds are moved to the Position on reset of weather alarm, blocking and forced operation and operation via the “direct” and “auto-matic” communica-tion objects is enabled again.

The monitoring period is restarted after each receipt of a telegram, after the programming of the actuator and on bus voltage recovery.

If the parameter Position for wind alarm has been set to “no reaction”, a wind alarm is not carried out for the respective output and the cyclical mo-nitoring of the object is not taken into account. The same applies to the rain alarm and frost alarm functions.


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

If more than one wind object has been assigned to a shutter/blind, the values in the associated communication objects “Wind alarm no. X” are logi-cally linked via an OR gate i.e. if there is a wind alarm at one of the assigned communication objects (or a tele-gram is omitted within the monitoring period), the shutter/blind remains in the Position for wind alarm until there are no wind alarms at any of the assigned objects.

Telegram value: “0”: No alarm (operation enabled) “1”: Alarm (operation blocked)

Block

If a telegram with the value “0” is recei-ved at this communication object, the output can be operated via the “di-rect” and “automatic” communication objects. If a telegram with the value “1” is received, the output moves to the set Position for blocking. The opera-tion of the output via the “direct” and “automatic” communication objects is disabled.

If a telegram with the value “0” is re-ceived for the fi rst time after a “1”, the shutter/blind moves into the Position on reset of wind alarm, blocking and forced operation and operation via the “direct” and “auto-matic” communica-tion objects is enabled again.

Telegram value: “0”: Operation enabled “1”: Operation blocked

Forced operation

If a telegram with the value “2” (binary 10) is received at this commu-nication object, the shutter/blind is raised. Operation via the “direct” and “automatic” communication objects is blocked. If a telegram with the value “3” (binary 11) is received, the shutter/blind is lowered. Operation via the “di-rect” and “automatic” communi-cation objects is blocked.

If a telegram with the value “0” (binary 00) or “1” (binary 01) is recei-ved at this communication object, the shutter/blind moves into the Position on reset of wind alarm, blocking and forced operation and operation via the “direct” and “automatic” communi-ca-tion objects is enabled again.

Telegram value: “0” (binary 00): Operation enabled “1” (binary 01): Operation enabled “2” (binary 10): UP/operation blocked “3” (binary 11): DOWN/operation blocked

“Status response”


Never set the Write-fl ag for“Status response”communication objects!

The “Status response”communication objects don’tsend their value, in case thevalue has not been

actualized, e.g. if no reference positionhas been reached after a bus voltagebreak down!

Telegr. status of position 0...255

The Shutter Actuator sends the current position of the shutter/blind to this communication object.

The current position is sent approx. 5 seconds after the completion of a movement. If a new movement is started in the meantime, the current position is only sent once the last ac-tion has been completed.


Telegr. status of louvres 0...255

The Shutter Actuator sends the current position of the louvres to this commu-nication object. The current position is sent approx. 5 seconds after the completion of a movement. If a new movement is started in the meantime, the current position is only sent once the last action has been completed.

Telegram value: “0”: Louvres opened to maximum “...”: Intermediate position “255”: Louvres closed


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

Telegr. status of upper position

The Shutter Actuator sends the infor-mation to this communication object as to whether the shutter/blind is loca-ted in the upper limit position or not. The current position is sent approx. 5 seconds after the completion of a mo-vement. If a new movement is started in the meantime, the current position is only sent once the last action has been completed.

Telegram value: “0”: Shutter/blind not in upper limit position “1”: Shutter/blind in upper limit position

Telegr. status of lower position

The Shutter Actuator sends the infor-mation to this communication object as to whether the shutter/blind is loca-ted in the lower limit position or not. The current position is sent approx. 5 seconds after the completion of a mo-vement. If a new movement is started in the meantime, the current position is only sent once the last action has been completed.

Telegram value: “0”: Shutter/blind not in lower limit position “1”: Shutter/blind in lower limit position

If on both communication objects “Telegr. status of upper position” and “Telegr. status of lower position”

a “1” is sent at the same time, the actuator does not know the position of the shutter/blind. The values of the position communication objects are not valid!

Telegr. status of operation

The Shutter Actuator sends the infor-mation to this communication object as to whether operation via the “direct” and “automatic” communication ob-jects has been enabled or disabled.

Operation is disabled if one of the “safety” functions has been activated (e.g. wind alarm) or if the Shutter Actu-ator has been switched to manual ope-ration (e.g. via the push button “Man.”) or if both, direct and automatic control is disabled via communication object. The status is sent after a change.


Telegr. status of automatic control

The Shutter Actuator sends the infor-mation to this communication object as to whether automatic control (automa-tic sun protection or automatic heating/cooling) has been activated.

Automatic control is activated if a telegram with the value “1” has been received at the communication object “Activation of automatic control” and neither the safety functions nor manual operation have been activated. The status is sent after a change.

Telegram value: “0”: Automatic control not activated “1”: Automatic control activated

Telegr. status byte

The Shutter Actuator sends the infor-mation about the current operating mode of the output to this communica-tion object. Only one operating mode can be activated at the same time. The status byte is sent after a change.

Telegram code: 76543210 “0”: Not activated “1”: Activated

7: Automatic sun protection 6: Automatic heating/cooling 5: Wind alarm 4: Rain alarm 3: Frost alarm 2: Forced operation 1: Block 0: not used


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

Communication objects in the

operating mode “Ventilation

fl aps/switch mode”

Ventilation fl aps Open-Closed/On-Off

The output contact closes if a telegram with the value “1” is received at this communication object. The connected ventilation fl aps are thereby opened or the connected loads are switched on.

If a telegram with the value “0” is recei-ved, the ventilation fl aps are closed or the loads are switched off. The output contact reverts to the neutral position.

Telegram value: “1”: Open/On “0”: Closed/Off


The “safety” communication objects

– Wind alarm no. X– Rain alarm– Frost alarm– Block– Forced operation

carry out the same function in the ope-rating mode “Ventilation fl aps/switch mode” as in the operating modes “Shutter” and “Blinds”.

Telegr. status Open-Closed/On-Off

If the Shutter Actuator sends the infor-mation to this communication object as to whether the ventilation fl aps are opened or closed or the connec-ted loads are switched on or off. The current status is always sent after a change.

Telegram value: “0”: Ventilation fl aps CLOSED/ switch contact OFF “1”: Ventilation fl aps OPEN/ switch contact ON

Telegr. status of operation

The Shutter Actuator sends the infor-mation to this communication object as to whether operation has been enabled or blocked via the communication ob-jects “Ventilations fl aps Open-Closed/On-Off” and “Scene”.

Operation is blocked if one of the “safety” functions has been activa-ted (e.g. wind alarm) or if the Shutter Actuator has been switched to manual operation (e.g. via the push button “Man.”). The operational status is sent after a change.


Telegr. status byte

The Shutter Actuator sends the infor-mation about the current operating mode of the output to this communica-tion object. Only one operating mode can be activated at the same time.

The status byte is sent after a change.

Telegram code: 76543210 “0”: Not activated “1”: Activated

7: “0” (not used) 6: “0” (not used) 5: Wind alarm 4: Rain alarm 3: Frost alarm 2: Forced operation 1: Block 0: not used


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

Parameters

Some of the parameters of the appli-cation program can be hidden or dis-played via the button “High Access”/“Low Access”. The default values are deseribed in the technical data sheets.

“A…X - Safety” parameter window

Order of priority for safety functions

For defi ning the priority between the safety functions of weather alarm, blocking and forced operation.

Order of priority for weather alarm

functions

For defi ning the priority between the weather alarm functions of wind alarm, rain alarm and frost alarm.

Communication object no. X for

wind alarm

If the option “activated” is selected, the communication object “Wind alarm no. X” appears.

Monitoring period for wind alarm [s]

Monitoring period for rain alarm [s]

Monitoring period for frost alarm [s]

For setting the monitoring period for the wind alarm, rain alarm or frost alarm in seconds. The monitoring period in the Shutter Actuator should be at least twice as long as the cyclical sending time of the sensor so that the shutters/blinds are not immediately moved to the alarm position due to the negligible omission of a signal (e.g. due to a high bus load).

If the value of this parameter is set to “0”, the monitoring of the communica-tion object is deactivated.

Rain alarm

Frost alarm

If the option “activated” is selected, the communication object “Rain alarm” or “Frost alarm” appears.

Parameters in the operating

modes “Shutter” and “Blinds”

“A - General” parameter window

Operating mode

The operating mode is set via this parameter. The communication objects and the parameters for the respective output differ depending on the opera-ting mode.

The parameters for the operating mo-des “Shutter” and “Blinds” are descri-bed in the following section.

Position on bus voltage failure

For setting the behaviour on bus volta-ge failure. If the option “no reaction” is set, the output contacts remain in their current posi-tion. In the option “Stop”, the shutter/blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position.

Position on bus voltage recovery

For setting the behaviour on bus volta-ge recovery. If the option “no reaction” is set, the output contacts remain in their current posi-tion. In the option “Stop”, the shutter/blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position. If the option “Position X” is selected, the shutter/blind fi rst moves right to the top after bus voltage recovery (refe-rence movement) before it travels to the set position.

Position after programming and

bus reset

For setting the behaviour after pro-gramming or bus reset. If the option “no reaction” is set, the output con-tacts remain in their current position. In the option “Stop”, the shutter/blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position. If the option “Position X” is selected, the shutter/blind fi rst moves right to the top after programming (reference movement) before it travels to the set position.

Automatic control

The communication objects “Activation of automatic control” and “Sun” as well as the parameter window “Auto 1” appear if the option “activa-ted” is selected.

8 bit scene

If the option “yes” is selected, both the communication object “Scene” and the parameter window “Scene” appear.


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

Position after reference movement

If the option “no reaction” or “back to saved position” is selected, the com-munication object “Reference move-ment” appears.

This parameter specifi es how the Shut-ter Actuator behaves after a reference movement. If the option “no reaction” is set, the shutter/blind remains in the reference position i.e. right at the top or right at the bottom. If the option “back to the saved posi-tion” is set, the shutter/blind is moved back to the position it occupied prior to the reference movement. If automatic control was activated for the shutter/blind prior to the reference movement, automatic control is reac-tivated once the saved position has been reached.

“Drive” parameter window

Total travel time [s]

For setting the total travel time in seconds.

Duration of louvre adjustment [ms]

(only in the “Blinds” operating mode)For setting the duration of louvre adjus-tment in milliseconds.

Pause on change in direction [ms]

For setting the pause on change in direction in milliseconds.

The technical data supplied by the manufacturer of the drive must be taken into account!

Max. number of louvre adjustments

(only in the “Blinds” operating mode)For setting the maximum number of louvre adjustments.

Start-up delay [ms]

For setting the start-up delay for the drive in milliseconds.

Deceleration delay [ms]

For setting the deceleration delay for the drive in milliseconds.

Limit travelling range

If the option “yes” is selected, the communication object “Shutter Up-Down limited” or “Blinds Up-down limited” appears together with the parameters “Upper limit” and “Lower limit”.

Upper limit 0..100 %

Lower limit 0..100 %

For setting the upper or lower limit of the travelling range.

“Safety” parameter window

Output reacts to communication

object for wind alarm no.

This parameter specifi es which wind alarm objects the output reacts to. The values of the linked communicati-on objects are connected with an OR function.

This parameter must be set to “Output does not react on wind alarm” if no wind alarm communication object is used!

Position for wind alarm

Position for rain alarm

Position for frost alarm

For setting the behaviour in the event of a weather alarm. In the option “Stop”, the shutter/blind is halted im-mediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position. If the option “no reaction” is set, the current movement is carried out in full. If the option “deactivated” is selected, this output does not react to either an alarm or to the monitoring period.

Disable via communication object

If the option “activated” is selected, the communication object “Block” appears as well as the parameter Position for blocking.

Position for blocking

For setting the behaviour during disab-le mode. If the option “no reaction” is set, the current movement is carried out in full. In the option “Stop”, the shutter/blind is halted im-mediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position.

Forced operation (2 bit)

The communication object “Forced operation” appears if the option “acti-vated” is selected.

Position on reset of weather alarm,

blocking and forced operation

This parameter defi nes how the output behaves after a safety alarm. If the option “no reaction” is set, the current movement is carried out in full. In the option “Stop”, the shutter/blind is hal-ted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position.


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

In the option “move to saved position”, the shutter/blind moves to the position it occupied prior to the safety alarm. If automatic control was activated when the safety alarm occurred, it is reactivated.

If in the meantime telegramms are re-ceived on the move to position objects (e.g. “Move to position 1/2” or “Move to position 0…255”), the shutter/blind will be positioned accordingly.

“Status” parameter window

Send position: 0…255

If the option “yes” is selected, the communication objects “Telegr. status of position” (“Shutter” and “Blinds” operating modes) and “Telegr. status of louvres” (only in “Blinds” operating mode) appear.

Send position: limit position reached

If the option “yes” is selected, the communication objects “Telegr. status of upper position” and “Telegr. status of lower position” appear.

Send status of operation

If the option “yes” is selected, the communication object “Telegr. status of operation” appears.

Send status of automatic control

If the option “yes” is selected, the communication object “Telegr. status of automatic control”. This parameter is only visible, if the option “activated“ is selected for the parameter Automatic control in the “General“ parameter window.

Send status byte

The communication object “Telegr. status byte” appears if the option “yes” is selected.

“Pos. 1” parameter window

Move to position 0...255

If the option “activated” is selected, the communication objects “Move to posi-tion 0...255” (in “Shutter” and “Blinds” operating modes) as well as “Move louvres 0...255” (only in “Blinds” operating mode).

Objects for “Move to position”

Objects for “Set position”

If the option “activated” is selected, the communication objects “Move to position 1/2” and “Set position 1/2” or “Move to position 3/4” and “Set positi-on 3/4” appear as well as the parame-ter window “Pos. 2”.

Move to position

If the option “directly” is selected, the shutter/blind moves directly from the current position to the new target position.

If the option “indirectly via top” or “in-directly via bottom” is selected, the shutter/blind fi rst moves completely up or completely down and then into the target position.

If the option “indirectly via shortest way is selected, the shutter/blind fi rst moves completely up or completely down, depending on which detour is the shortest, and then into the target position.

“Pos. 2” parameter window

Overwrite preset values during

download

Options: – yes – no

This parameter defi nes whether the preset values stored in the Shutter Actuator should be overwritten during a download with the parameterised preset values. If the option “yes” is selected, the communication objects Position X: Blinds 0…100 % and Posi-tion X: Louvres 0…100 % appear.

If individual preset values have already been specifi ed by the user during operation, this parameter should be set

to “no” so that these individual posi-tions are retained.

Position X: Shutter 0...100 % or Posi-

tion X: Blinds 0...100 %

For setting the preset value for the height of the shutter/blind when mo-ving into a preset position.

Position X: Louvres 0...100 %

For setting the preset value for louvre adjustment when moving into a preset position.


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

“Auto 1” parameter window

This parameter window is only visible, if the option “activated” is selected for the parameter Automatic control in the “General” parameter window.

Deactivation of automatic control

This parameter defi nes whether au-tomatic control should only be deac-tivated via the communication object “Activation of automatic control” or via the “direct” communication objects in addition.

If the second option is selected and a telegram is received at a “direct” communication object when automatic control is activated, automatic control is deactivated and the direct move-ment command is carried out.

Toggling to automatic control

Toggling to direct operation

This parameter specifi es whether toggling to automatic control or direct operation is enabled or disabled. If the option “enable/disable via com-munication object” is selected, the communication object “Enable/disable automatic control” or “Enable/block direct operation” appears.

Position for sun = “1” (sun)

For setting the behaviour if the sun = “1” (sun) in automatic sun protection mode. If the option “receive position via 8 bit value” is selected, the com-munication objects “Move to position for sun 0...255” and “Adjust louvres for sun 0..255” appear. If the option “no reaction” is set, the current move-ment is carried out in full. In the option “Stop”, the shutter/blind is halted im-mediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position.

Position for sun = “0” (no sun)

For setting the behaviour if the sun = “0” (no sun) in automatic sun protec-tion mode. If the option “no reaction” is set, the current movement is carried out in full. In the option “Stop”, the shutter/blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position.

Delay for sun = “1” [s]

Delay for sun = “0” [s]

For setting the delay in seconds when activating the Position for sun = “1” or Position for sun = “0”.

Automatic heating/cooling

If the option “activated” is selected, the communication objects “Presence”, “Heating” and “Cooling” appear as well as the parameter window “Auto 2”.

“Auto 2” parameter window

This parameter window is only visible, if the option “activated” is selected for the parameter Automatic heating/cool-ing in the “Auto 1” parameter window.

Delay for presence = “0” [s]

Delay for presence = “1” [s]

For setting the delay in seconds when toggling between automatic sun pro-tection and automatic heating/cooling.

Position for heating = “X”

and sun = “X”

For setting the behaviour when the sun = “1” (sun) or sun = “0” (no sun) in heating mode (Heating = “1”) or in cooling mode (Cooling = “1”). If the option “no reaction” is set, the out-puts remain in their current position. In the option “Stop”, the shutter/blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position.

“Scene” parameter window

This parameter window is only visible, if the option “activated” is selected for the parameter 8-bit-scene in the “Gen-eral” parameter window.

Scene assignment (X)

This parameter defi nes into which scenes the shutter/blind should be integrated. Each shutter/blind can be integrated in up to 10 out of a total of 64 scenes per group address.

Parameters in the operatingmode “Ventilation fl aps/switch mode”

“A - General” parameter window

Operating mode

The operating mode is set via this parameter. The communication objects and the parameters for the respective output differ according to the operating mode. The following section describes the parameters for the operating mode “Ventilation fl aps/switch mode”.


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

Position on bus voltage failure

For setting the behaviour on bus voltage failure. In the option “Closed-Off”, the output contact reverts to the neutral position.

Position on bus voltage recovery

For setting the behaviour on bus volta-ge recovery. In the option “Closed-Off”, the output contact re-verts to the neutral position.

Position after programming and

bus reset

For setting the behaviour after pro-gramming or bus reset. In the option “Closed-Off”, the output contact reverts to the neutral position.

Staircase lighting function

The staircase lighting function is activa-ted via this parameter. If “activated” is selected, the parameter Duration/ope-ning time for staircase lighting appears.

Duration/opening time for staircase

lighting [s]

For setting the duration/opening time for staircase lighting in seconds.

“Safety” parameter window

Output reacts to communication

object for wind alarm no.

This parameter defi nes which wind alarm objects the output reacts to. The values of the linked communi-ca-tion objects are connected via an OR function.

Position for wind alarm

Position for rain alarm

Position for frost alarm

For setting the behaviour in the event of a weather alarm. In the option “Closed-Off”, the output contact re-verts to the neutral position.

If the option “no reaction” is set, the current movement is carried out in full. If the option “deactivated” is selected, this output does not react to an alarm or to the monitoring period.

Disable via communication object

If the option “activated” is selected, the communication object “Block” appears as well as the parameter Position for blocking.

Position for blocking

For setting the behaviour during disab-le mode. If the option “no reaction” is set, the output contacts remain in their current position. In the option “Closed-Off”, the output contact reverts to the neutral position.

Forced operation (2 bit)

The communication object “Forced operation” appears if the option “acti-vated” is selected.

Position on reset of weather alarm,

blocking and forced operation

This parameter defi nes how the output behaves after a safety alarm. If the option “no reaction” is set, the output contacts remain in their current positi-on. In the option “Closed”, the output contact reverts to the neutral position.

“Status” parameter window

Send position: Open-Closed/On-Off

If the option “yes” is selected, the communication object “Telegr. status Open-Closed/On-Off” appears.

Send status of operation

If the option “yes” is selected, the communication object “Telegr. status of operation” appears.

Send status byte

The communication object “Telegr. status byte” appears if the option “yes” is selected.


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7


in “Blinds” operating mode using “Output A” as an example


in “Shutter” operating modeusing “Output A” as an example

“Automatic” communication objects

in “Blinds” operating modeusing “Output A” as an example

“Automatic” communication objects

in “Shutter” operating modeusing “Output A” as an example

No. Type Object name Function

11 1 bit Output A Move blinds Up-Down 12 1 bit Output A Louvre adj./Stop Up-Down

13 1 byte Output A Move to position 0…255 14 1 byte Output A Move louvres 0...255

15 1 bit Output A Move to position 1/2 16 1 bit Output A Move to position 3/4

17 1 bit Output A Set position 1/2 18 1 bit Output A Set position 3/4

19 1 bit Output A Blinds Up-Down limited 10 1 bit Output A Reference movement

21 1 byte Output A Scene


11 1 bit Output A Move shutter Up-Down 12 1 bit Output A Stop Up-Down

13 1 byte Output A Move to position 0…255 15 1 bit Output A Move to position 1/2

16 1 bit Output A Move to position 3/4 17 1 bit Output A Set position 1/2

18 1 bit Output A Set position 3/4 19 1 bit Output A Shutter Up-Down limited

20 1 bit Output A Reference movement 21 1 byte Output A Scene


22 1 bit Output A Activation of automatic control 23 1 bit Output A Sun

24 1 byte Output A Move to position for sun 0…255 25 1 byte Output A Adjust louvres for sun 0…255

26 1 bit Output A Presence 27 1 bit Output A Heating

28 1 bit Output A Cooling 29 1 bit Output A Enable/disable automatic control

30 1 bit Output A Enable/block direct operation


22 1 bit Output A Activation of automatic control 23 1 bit Output A Sun

24 1 byte Output A Move to position for sun 0...255 26 1 bit Output A Presence

27 1 bit Output A Heating 28 1 bit Output A Cooling

29 1 bit Output A Enable/disable automatic control 30 1 bit Output A Enable/block direct operation


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7


All operating modesGeneral for all outputs A...H or using“Output A” as an example

“Status response” communication

objects

In the “Blinds” operating modeusing “Output A” as an example

“Status response” communication

objects

In the “Shutter” operating modeusing “Output A” as an example


1 1 bit Output A...H Wind alarm no. 1 2 1 bit Output A...H Wind alarm no. 2

3 1 bit Output A...H Wind alarm no. 3 4 1 bit Output A...H Rain alarm

5 1 bit Output A...H Frost alarm 31 1 bit Output A Block

32 2 bit Output A Forced operation


33 1 byte Output A Telegr. status of position 34 1 byte Output A Telegr. status of louvres

35 1 bit Output A Telegr. status of upper position 36 1 bit Output A Telegr. status of lower position

37 1 bit Output A Telegr. status of operation 38 1 bit Output A Telegr. status of automatic control

39 1 byte Output A Telegr. status byte


33 1 byte Output A Telegr. status of position 35 1 bit Output A Telegr. status of upper position

36 1 bit Output A Telegr. status of lower position 37 1 bit Output A Telegr. status of operation

38 1 bit Output A Telegr. status of automatic control 39 1 byte Output A Telegr. status byte

Other communication objects

In the operating mode “Ventilation fl aps/switch mode”using “Output A” as an example


11 1 bit Output A Ventilation fl aps Open-Closed/On-Off

37 1 bit Output A Telegr. status Open-Closed/On-Off

38 1 bit Output A Telegr. status of operation

39 1 byte Output A Telegr. status byte


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

General parameters

General for all outputs A...H.The default setting for the values isprinted in bold type.

“A…X - Safety” parameter window– Order of priority for safety functions 1.Weather alarm-2.Block-3.Forced operation

1.Weather alarm-2.Forced operation-3.Block 1.Block-2.Weather alarm-3.Forced operation 1.Block-2.Forced operation-3.Weather alarm 1.Forced operation-2.Block-3.Weather alarm 1.Forced operation-2.Weather alarm-3.Block– Order of priority for weather alarm 1.Wind alarm-2.Rain alarm-3.Frost alarm

functions 1.Wind alarm-2.Frost alarm-3.Rain alarm 1.Rain alarm-2.Wind alarm-3.Frost alarm 1.Rain alarm-2.Frost alarm-3.Wind alarm 1.Frost alarm-2.Rain alarm-3.Wind alarm 1.Frost alarm-2.Wind alarm-3.Rain alarm– Communication object no. 1 for activated/deactivated

wind alarm– Communication object no. 2 for activated/deactivated

wind alarm– Communication object no. 3 for activated/deactivated

wind alarm– Monitoring period for wind alarm [s] 0..1,000 (0)– Rain alarm activated/deactivated

Only if “activated”: – Monitoring period for rain alarm [s] 0..1,000 (0)

– Frost alarm activated/deactivated Only if “activated”: – Monitoring period for frost alarm [s] 0..1,000 (0)


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

“A - General” parameter window– Operating mode Shutter/Blinds/ Ventilation fl aps/switch mode– Position on bus voltage failure no reaction/Up/Down/Stop– Position on bus voltage recovery no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ Position 2/Position 3/Position 4– Position after programming no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ and bus reset Position 2/Position 3/Position 4– Automatic control activated/deactivated– 8 bit scene activated/deactivated

– Position after reference movement no reaction/ move to saved position/deactivated

“Drive” parameter window– Total travel time [s] 0..6,000 (60)

Only if “Operating mode” = “Blinds” – Duration of louvre adjustment 50..1,000 (200)

[ms]– Pause on change in direction 50..10,000 (500) Only if “Operating mode” = “Blinds” – Max. number of louvre adjustments 1..60 (7)– Start-up delay [ms] 0..255 (0)

– Deceleration delay [ms] 0..255 (0)– Limit travelling range yes/no

Only if “yes” is selected: – Upper limit 0...100 % 0..100 (0)

(0 % = top; 100 % = bottom) – Lower limit 0...100 % 0..100 (100)

(0 % = top; 100 % = bottom)

“Safety” parameter window – Output reacts to communication Output does not react on wind alarm/ object for wind alarm no. 1/2/3/1+2/1+3/2+3/1+2+3– Position for wind alarm deactivated/ activated – up/ activated – down/ activated – no reaction– Position for rain alarm deactivated/ activated – up/ activated – down/ activated – no reaction– Position for frost alarm deactivated/ activated – up/ activated – down/ activated – no reaction– Disable via communication object activated/deactivated

Only if “activated” – Position for blocking no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ Position 2/Position 3/Position 4– Forced operation activated/deactivated– Position on reset of weather alarm, no reaction/Stop/ blocking and forced operation move to saved position

Parameters

Separate for each output in the opera-ting modes “Shutter” and “Blinds”.The default setting for the values isprinted in bold type.


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

“Status” parameter window– Send position: 0...255 yes/no

– Send position: limit position reached yes/no– Send status of operation yes/no

Only if “Automatic control” = “activated” – Send status of automatic control yes/no

– Send status byte yes/no

Only if “Move to position” = “activated”“Pos. 1” parameter window

– Move to position 0...255 activated/deactivated

(8 bit value)– Objects for “Move to Position” activated/deactivated

(1 bit preset) Only if “Objects for “Move to Position”’ = “activated” – “Objects for Set Position” activated/deactivated

(1 bit preset)– Move to position directly/indirectly via top/indirectly via bottom/indirectly via shortest way

In the “Blinds” operating mode Only if “Objects for “Move to Position”’ = “activated”“Pos. 2” parameter window

– Overwrite preset values during download yes/no only if “Overwrite preset values during download” = “yes”– Position 1: Blinds 0...100 % 0...100 (20)

(0 % = top; 100 % = bottom)– Position 1: Louvres 0...100 % 0...100 (20)

(0 % = open; 100 % = closed)– Position 2: Blinds 0...100 % 0...100 (40)

(0 % = top; 100 % = bottom)– Position 2: Louvres 0...100 % 0...100 (40)

(0 % = open; 100 % = closed) Only if “Objects for Set Position”’ = “activated” – Position 3: Blinds 0...100 % 0...100 (60)

(0 % = top; 100 % = bottom) – Position 3: Louvres 0...100 % 0...100 (60)

(0 % = open; 100 % = closed) – Position 4: Blinds 0...100 % 0...100 (80)

(0 % = top; 100 % = bottom) – Position 4: Louvres 0...100 % 0...100 (80)

(0 % = open; 100 % = closed)


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

In the “Shutter” operating mode Only if “Objects for “Move to Position”’ = “activated”“Pos. 2” parameter window

– Overwrite preset values during download yes/no only if “Overwrite preset values during download” = “yes”– Position 1: Shutter 0...100 % 0...100 (20)

(0 % = top; 100 % = bottom)– Position 2: Shutter 0...100 % 0...100 (40)

(0 % = top; 100 % = bottom) Only if “Objects for Set Position”’ = “activated” – Position 3: Shutter 0...100 % 0...100 (60)

(0 % = top; 100 % = bottom) – Position 4: Shutter 0...100 % 0...100 (80)

(0 % = top; 100 % = bottom)

Only if “Automatic control” = “activated”“Auto 1” parameter window

– Deactivation of automatic control via object “Activation of automatic control”/ via object “Activation of automatic

control” and direct objects– Toggling to automatic control enabled/ enable/disable via communication object

– Toggling to direct operation enabled/ enable/disable via communication object– Position for sun = “1” no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/ (sun) Position 1/Position 2/Position 3/Position 4/ receive position via 8 bit value– Position for sun = “0” no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/ (no sun) Position 1/Position 2/Position 3/Position 4– Delay for sun = “1” [s] 0...6,000 (60)

– Delay for sun = “0” [s] 0...6,000 (240)– Automatic heating/cooling activated/deactivated

Only if “Automatic heating/cooling” = “activated”“Auto 2” parameter window

– Delay for presence = “1” [s] 0...6,000 (0)– Delay for presence = “0” [s] 0...6,000 (600)

– Position for heating = “1” and no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ sun = “1” Position 2/Position 3/Position 4– Position for heating = “1” and no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ sun = “0” Position 2/Position 3/Position 4– Position for cooling = “1” and no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ sun = “1” Position 2/Position 3/Position 4– Position for cooling = “1” and no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ sun = “0” Position 2/Position 3/Position 4

Only if “8 bit scene” = “activated”“Scene” parameter window

– Scene assignment (1) no assignment/0...63– Scene assignment (2) no assignment/0...63– Scene assignment (3) no assignment/0...63– Scene assignment (4) no assignment/0...63– Scene assignment (5) no assignment/0...63– Scene assignment (6) no assignment/0...63– Scene assignment (7) no assignment/0...63– Scene assignment (8) no assignment/0...63– Scene assignment (9) no assignment/0...63– Scene assignment (10) no assignment/0...63


2CDC 506 026 D0201


JA/S 8.230.1JA/S 8.230.1


7 7

Parameters

Separate for each output in the ope-rating mode “Ventilation fl aps/switch mode”.The default setting for the values isprinted in bold type.

“A - General” parameter window– Operating mode Shutter/Blinds/ Ventilation fl aps/switch mode– Position on bus voltage failure Closed-Off/Open-On/no reaction– Position on bus voltage recovery Closed-Off/Open-On/no reaction– Position after programming Closed-Off/Open-On/no reaction and bus reset– Staircase lighting function activated/deactivated

Only if “activated”: – Duration/opening time for 0...30,000 (60)

staircase lighting [s]

“Safety” parameter window– Output reacts to communication Output does not react on wind alarm/ object for wind alarm no. 1/2/3/1+2/1+3/2+3/1+2+3– Position for wind alarm activated – closed-off/ activated – open-on/ activated – no reaction/ deactivated– Position for rain alarm activated – closed-off/ activated – open-on/ activated – no reaction/ deactivated

– Position for frost alarm activated – closed-off/ activated – open-on/ activated – no reaction/ deactivated– Disable via communication object activated/deactivated

Only if “activated”: – Position for blocking Closed-Off/Open-On/no reaction– Forced operation activated/deactivated– Position on reset of weather alarm, Closed-Off/Open-On/no reaction blocking and forced operation

“Status” parameter window– Send position: Open-Closed/On-Off yes/no

– Send status of operation yes/no– Send status byte yes/no


LK/S 4.1LK/S 4.1

Line Coupler, MDRCLK/S 4.1, 2CDG 110 027 R0011

Page 1 of 6 LKS_41_TD_EN_V1-02CDC 502 035 D0201

22The coupler can be used as a line/backbone coupler or as a line repeater. Used as a line coupler, it links a line to a main line. Used as an backbone coupler, it links a main line to the back-bone line. In this respect it provides electrical isolation.

At the same time telegrams can be fi ltered. In this way only the telegrams can be passed on, which are intended for the other respective line. For diag-nostic purposes all telegrams can also be passed on or blocked.

Technical data

Supply voltage – EIB 24 V DC, via the bus line

Operating and display elements – green LED (1)– red LED (6) and push button (7)– yellow LED (2)– yellow LED (3)

ON, device is ready for operationFor programming the physical addressTelegram traffi c on the primary line (main line) Telegram traffi c on the secondary line (line)

Connections – EIB, secondary line– EIB, primary line

Left bus connection terminalRight bus connection terminal

Type of protection – IP 20, EN 60 529

Ambient temperature range – Operation– Storage/transport

– 5 °C … 45 °C– 25 °C … 70 °C

Design – Modular installation device proM, MDRC

Housing, color – Plastic housing, grey

Mounting – On 35 mm mounting rail, DIN EN 60715

Dimensions – 90 x 36 x 64 mm (H x W x D)

Mounting depth/width – 2 modules at 18 mm

Weight – 0.075 kg

Certifi cation – EIB-certifi ed

Electrical safety – Degree of pollution (in acc. with IEC 60664-1): 2 – Type of protection (in acc. with EN 60529): IP 20– Protection class (in acc. with IEC 61140): III– Overvoltage category (in acc. with EN 60664-1): III– Bus: safety extra low voltage SELV DC 24 V– Device complies with EN 50090-2-2 and IEC 60664-1

EMC requirements – Complies with EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3 and EN 50090-2-2

2CD

C 0

71 3

13 F

0004


LK/S 4.1LK/S 4.1


2 2


Application programs Number of


Max. no. of

group addresses

Max. no. of

assignments

Couple/1Repeat/1

00

00

00

1 Operational LED (On)2 LED for telegram traffi c on primary/main line3 LED for telegram traffi c on secondary line (line)4 Bus connection terminal for EIB

connection of primary/main line

LK/S 4.1

ABB i-bus®

Line

ON

Main

2 1

1 = Main Line2 = Line

Line

7

6

1

4

2

3

5

8

��

� ��

��

��

��

� ��

��

�

��

��

��

��

�� !

��

�

��

��

�

� "#$ �%&� "��

�� !

#$ �%&�

��

��

��

�%&�

��

'�%&

�

� "'�%&�%&� "�%&�

�%&�

��

�

� 2CD

C 0

72 5

60 F

0004

A: Line (secondary line)B: Main line (primary line)

Wiring diagram

5 Bus connection terminal for EIB connection of secondary line (line)

6 Programming LED7 Programming button8 Label holder


LK/S 4.1LK/S 4.1



22Couple/1

Selection in ETS2

– ABB System components Coupler

Line/backbone coupler

The coupler links two lines for data transfer, but isolates them electrically.

If the coupler receives telegrams (for example during commissioning) which use a physical address as desti-nation address, it compares the physi-cal addresses of the sender and recei-ver with its own physical address and then decides whether it must route the telegrams or not. If the coupler has not yet received its own physical address, it can cause faults when commissio-ning other devices.

The coupler reacts to telegrams with group addresses in accordance with its parameter settings.

During normal operation (default set-ting), the coupler only routes those telegrams whose group addresses have been entered in its fi lter table.

Particularly during commissioning and for diagnostic purposes, it may be a good idea to set the fi rst two para-meters to „Group telegrams main line -> line“ and „Group telegrams line -> main line“ to „route“.

If the EIB installation then functions without any errors after the commis-sioning of the sensors and actuators, the ETS program can calculate the correct fi lter table. The two parameters can now be reset to the default values again. The application must then be reprogrammed. The correct fi lter table is then transferred into the coupler.

There is no space for main groups 14 and 15 in the fi lter table. They should therefore normally not be con-fi gured. If they are used however, the parameters „Main group 14/15“ must be set to „route“.

If the coupler routes a telegram and does not receive an acknowledgement, or if a bus device fi nds a transmission error, the coupler repeats the telegram three times. With the parameters „Repetitions if errors...“, this behaviour can be set separately for both lines. These parameters should be left in the default setting.

Normally, the coupler only acknow-ledges the telegrams which it routes. The parameters „Telegram confi rmation ...“ enable the coupler to acknowledge each telegram separately for both lines. These parameters should also be left in the default setting.

Programming / download

For programming the line coupler at least the primary line must be connec-ted. If the secondary line is connected as well, then the LK/S can also be programmed from the secondary line.


LK/S 4.1LK/S 4.1


2 2


Parameters

The default setting of the values is shown in bold type.

– Group telegrams route main line -> line block fi lter

– Group telegrams route line -> main line block fi lter

– Main group 14/15 route

block– Repeat telegrams if yes

errors on main line no– Repeat telegrams if yes

errors on line no– Telegram confi rmation always on main line only if routed

– Telegram confi rmation always on line only if routed

Group telegrams main line -> line

Group telegrams line -> main line

route

All group telegrams are routed.

Block

No group telegrams are routed.

fi lter

Only group telegrams are routed which are entered in the fi lter table. The ETS 3 produces the fi lter table automatically. When using ETS2, the fi lter table must be calculated by clicking on the button „Filter“.

Main group 14/15

route

Group telegrams with the main group 14 + 15 (e.g. 14/1) are routed.

Block

Group telegrams with the main group 14 + 15 (e.g. 14/1) are not routed.

Repeat telegrams if

errors on main line

Yes

If a transmission error (e.g. due to mis-sing receiver) is found when sending a telegram on the primary line (main line), the telegram is repeated up to 3 times.

No

The telegram is not repeated.

Explanation of the parameters Repeat telegrams if

errors on line

Yes

If a transmission error (e.g. due to mis-sing receiver) is found when sending a telegram on the secondary line (line), the telegram is repeated up to 3 times.

No


Telegram confi rmation on main line

Always

Each telegram on the primary line (main line) is confi rmed (ACK).

only if routed

Only telegrams which are to be routed are confi rmed on the primary line (main line) (ACK).

Telegram confi rmation on line

Always

Each telegram on the secondary line (line) is confi rmed (ACK).

only if routed

Only telegrams which are to be routed are confi rmed on the secondary line (line) (ACK).


LK/S 4.1LK/S 4.1



22Repeat/1

Selection in ETS2

– ABB System components Coupler

Line repeater

A coupler can also be used as a line repeater (repeater). In its function as a repeater, it links two line segments for data transfer, but isolates them electri-cally.

Up to three line repeaters can be used behind a line coupler. As a result, up to four line segments can form a com-plete line. Each line segment must be supplied by a dedicated EIB/KNX power supply.

The line repeaters do not have any fi lter tables. This means that a telegram is sent to all line segments irrespective of whether it is processed in the corre-sponding line segment. It is therefore not important whether the telegram has been triggered within the lines or whe-ther it has been sent from the main line to the lines via the line coupler.

If an error occurs during the trans-mission of a telegram with the physical address of a receiver, the line repeater can repeat the telegram. This beha-viour can be set separately for both line segments with the parameters „Repeat if errors on line / on segment in physical addressed telegrams“.

If the line repeater routes a group tele gram and does not receive an ack-nowledgement, or if a bus device fi nds a transmission error, the line repeater repeats the telegram three times. With the parameters „Repeat if errors on line / on segment in group tele-grams“, this behaviour can be set separately for line and segment.

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� �

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

�!"��

The EIB segments are each connected as secondary lines (left bus connection terminal) of the line repeater.


LK/S 4.1LK/S 4.1


2 2


Parameters

The default setting of the values is shown in bold type.

– Repeat if errors on line yes

in physical addressed telegrams no– Repeat if errors on line yes in group telegrams no

– Repeat if errors on segment yes

in physical addressed telegrams no– Repeat if errors on segment yes in group telegrams no

Repeat if errors on line

in physical addressed telegrams

Yes

If a transmission error (e.g. due to missing receiver) is found when sen-ding a physically addressed telegram (e.g. when programming a device) on the primary line (here: line), the tele-gram is repeated up to 3 times.

No


Repeat if errors on line in group

telegrams

Yes

If a transmission error (e.g. due to missing receiver) is found when sen-ding a group telegram on the primary line (here: line), the telegram is repea-ted up to 3 times.

No


Explanation of the parameters Repeat if errors on segment

in physical addressed telegrams

Yes

If a transmission error (e.g. due to missing receiver) is found when sen-ding a physically addressed telegram (e.g. when programming a device) on the secondary line (here: line segment), the telegram is repeated up to 3 times.

No


Repeat if errors on segment

in group telegrams

Yes

If a transmission error (e.g. due to missing receiver) is found when sending a group telegram on the secondary line (here: line segment), the telegram is repeated up to 3 times.

No


NNEETTxxKKNNXX®®

OO PP CC SS ee rr vv ee rr 33 .. 55

The basis of the NETxKNX® OPC server is the NETxKNX® technology, which proved it’s value so well in large projects, as to implement it also in small projects. Usability and configuration of the system has been simplified so much that it can be used by any project integrator without any large effort. The system allows the control and - in connection with an applicable OPC client - the visualization of small to large KNX plants. It builds a connection between the world of KNX and other systems. Experience and the know-how out of the large projects were used during development of the large number of small systems. So the system has been realized in a very reliable, open and user friendly way. The OPC Server is provided with a variant of the NETxKNX® MultiProject kernel, which takes place also in large systems. Therefore it is possible, to realize up to 100 ETS Projects in one plant (for more ETS-Projects please contact us). KNX Group addresses in the NETxKNX® OPC System are extended with the IP address of the gateway, therefore you can use the same ETS Structures (logical address areas) behind each Gateway. The logical address room of a KNX plant is extended, address collisions are not possible any more.

The new KNX Telegram Overflow Manager of the server ensures that the KNX-Bus is not overloaded. Telegrams will be sending to the KNX Bus in defined timestamps to ensure the maximum data transfer rate in the bus. If there are more gateways connected to the system, you can multiply the maximum of data transfer with the amount of gateways: with 10 gateways the system reaches e.g. 100

telegrams per second, with 100 – 1.000 telegrams per second. You can also benefit from the stability, the large amount of features of the NETxKNX® OPC server and the numerous possibilities of application.

The system consists of two parts: the OPC server and the OPC studio. The OPC server is an autonomic program, which execute and controls all operations in the KNX plant. The OPC studio is the interface between server and administrator, it is used only to analyse the actual state.

The extended OPC Studio allows telegram control with plain text description, extended filter functionalities and data point value control. With the import functionality it is possible to directly import the ETS(c) Projects and allow quick steps in the projects. This environment includes more valuable tools, which supports the administrator to manage, analyze and troubleshoot in the whole KNX project. The functionality of the OPC server KNX telegrams are converted by the gateways into LAN telegrams, which will be forwarded via the LAN

to the NETxKNX® Server.

The server receives, analyses, checks for errors in, protocols and sends the data via the OPC interface to

all connected OPC Clients. All events are logged in the LOG data and can be used for system analyses

and troubleshooting. Every malfunction of a gateway will be detected, displayed and additionally logged.

A virtual model of the whole KNX-plant is administrated by the server. Each telegram definition is shown

as a cell. In this cell not only the current value of the data point is stored, but also a list of further

information (e.g. time of the last change). The current value of a cell can be checked on the cell monitor in

the studio.

The Event Processor is an extension of the NETxKNX® Server kernel and makes complex, event based

commands possible.

Basic functions of NETxKNX® OPC Server 3.5

� UnifiedDriver for IP Routers, all IP gateway types can be used parallel � Device Monitor - physical addresses of the devices are listed in the OPC Server � New Data types – UI4 and UI8 allows data transfer with various values to the OPC Client � New N-Mesh Routing – routing of data and telegrams between OPC Servers � Redundancy – allows coupling of two OPC Server for more Redundancy � Extended NETIP Tunnelling Engine � Up to 1000 Gateways can be managed � All official EIS data types are supported � Up to 100.000 telegram definitions � Very high data transfer – up to 1.000 telegrams per second � MultiProject Core – multiple ETS Projects in one KNX plant � Workspace Management – multiple workspaces can be managed � Event Processor – cyclical, time referenced and event referenced actions can be defined in the

OPC Server � Link Manager – management of linked group addresses are realised directly with the OPC Server � KNX Telegram Overflow Manager – extended protection against KNX bus overload � Real Database Refresh - the update of the OPC Server database is done automatically � Gateway Manager – extended gateway management � Direct value scan from KNX devices for initialising the virtual model of the plant � Extended NETxKNX® OPC Studio with new features and functionalities � Extended address room – the real address of the data point consists of the logical KNX address

and the physical IP address � Data storage in ring memory – up to 10 Mio. last sent/received telegrams are stored in a LOG-file � Process view of the whole system is stored and automatically reloaded during the start of the

server � An Online-check the status of all connected gateways � Real time display of the telegram traffic with plain text description and additional information � Reliability – designed and developed for continuous operation � And much more features…

In addition the OPC Server includes an integrated Project simulation, which allows without any connection to the gateways, to check and simulate offline the created project.

When the system is switched online, the OPC Server allows the check for non reachable KNX devices. The server creates a list of these not reachable devices and this list can be monitored from each client (over a data point).

OPC Foundation specification OPC Data Access Server 2.05b Conformity is obligatory, also the permanent tests with the

OPC Foundation Compliance Tool (test results are available)

Security in the KNX Network: The NETxKNX® OPC server solution provides several variants for ensuring middle and high system stability.

E.g. you may want to increase the security in the network with a MAIN / BACKUP server solution, or if you want, you could have a CLUSTER server solution with more NETxKNX® OPC servers, the possibilities of configuration leave nothing to be desired.

Application areas: The NETxKNX® OPC Server 3.5 can be used in almost all areas of building automation and has expanded to a worldwide standard in the KNX world. If you want to control the KNX devices for jalousie control, to include wind and weather data in the system, control the lighting based on usage, manage the heating / cooling system or secure your building with WEB cams, the NETxKNX® OPC Server 3.5 supports you optimally in the management of these duties and responsibilities. Awards: The NETxKNX® OPC Server solutions enjoy a high international reputation, shown through the awards we received together with our partners at the “Light & Building” trade fair 2004 as winner of the EIBA AWARD 2004 and at the “Light & Building” trade fair 2006 as winner of the Architektur + Technology Award 2006

Modules and gateways 1):

Supported gateways:

NETxKNX® OPC Server 3.5 Direct(KNX) for all KNX Interfaces NETxKNX® OPC Server 3.5 UnifiedDriver for all IP Routers and IP Interfaces (e.g. ABB IG/S, ABB IPR/S, IP Router from Siemens, Merten Berker, Gira, EibNode,…)

Extended Server interfaces: SQL Database interface – extension module (optional) LabVIEW(c) interface – extension module (optional) WEB Server interface – extension module (optional) DAM 6000 interface – extension module (optional) Micros Fidelio(c) Interface – extension module (optional)

Every other OPC DA 2.0 Server for LON©, SPS©, BACKNET©, PROFIBUS© and other systems can be integrated into the KNX system with the NETxLAB® OPC Bridge.

1) recommended from KNX Association©.

For more information please contact:

NETxAutomation Software GmbH® Maria Theresia Straße 41 4600 Wels Austria

Phone +43 (0) 7242 252 900 0 Fax. +43 (0) 7242 252 900 21 e-Mail: [email protected] Web: www.netxautomation.com

© by NETxAutomation Software GmbH A Member of the KNX Association and OPC Foundation

Presented by:

NNEETTxxKKNNXX®®

OO PP CC SS ee rr vv ee rr 33 .. 55

The baseline of the NETxKNX® OPC server 3.5 is the NETxKNX® technology, which is proofed on value in large projects, to implement also in small projects. Usability and configuration of the system is very simplified, so it can be used from the project integrators without any large effort.

New Features

� Up to 1000 Gateways can be managed � Unified drivers all IP gateway types can be

used parallel � Device monitoring on physical addresses � N-Mesh Routing and Redundancy � New data types � Extended OPC Studio with more functionalities � …

Application areas: The NETxKNX® OPC Server 3.5 is nearly useable in all areas of building automation and expands to a worldwide standard in the KNX world. If you want to control the KNX devices for jalousie control, to include wind and weather data in the system, control the lightning usage based, manage the heating / cooling system or secure your building with WEB cams, the NETxKNX® OPC Server 3.5 support you optimally in the management of this duties and responsibilities. Supported gateways: NETxKNX® OPC Server 3.5 Direct(KNX) for all KNX interfaces NETxKNX® OPC Server 3.5 UnifiedDriver for all IP routers and IP Interfaces (e.g. ABB IG/S, ABB IPR/S, Merten, Siemens, eibNode,…) Recommended from KNX Association©. For more information please contact:

NETxAutomation Software GmbH® Maria Theresia Strasse 41 4600 Wels Austria

Phone +43 (0) 7242 252 900 0 Fax. +43 (0) 7242 252 900 21 e-Mail: [email protected] Web: www.netxautomation.com

© by NETxAutomation Software GmbH Member of the KNX Association and OPC Foundation

Presented by:

Building Management Systems

and smart homes have become

increasingly important over the

past years.

NP 106E

New Product Bulletin

Belden Offers KNX/EIB Approved Cables

To install and operate a building's managementsystems requires a wide range of technologies of different complexities. The control, monitor-ing and optimization of the various functionsand services include heating and cooling, ven -tilation, lighting and often even the manage-ment of electric appliances.

The basic control technologies have been in exis -tence for some time. Systems are available invarious degrees of complexity, ranging from thetimer-controlled water heater or thermo staticradiator valves (TRVs), to the so-called “intelli-gent houses” which manage, according to pre-arranged efficiency criteria, everything fromsafety and security systems to air conditioning,and from lighting and ventilation systems totelematic services and domestic appliances.

KNX

KNX standard is based upon more than 15 yearsof experience in the market including its pre -decessors EIB, EHS and BatiBUS.

In May 1999 the KNX Association cvba wasformed from combining:

• EIBA (European Installation Bus Association)

• EHSA (European Home Systems Association)

• BCI (BatiBUS Club International)

Its main objective is to promote the global stan-dard for fieldbus applications in home and build-ing control.

Standard offering from a registered manufacturer

KNX is approved as:

• European Standard (CENELEC EN 50090 and CEN EN 13321-1)

• International Standard (ISO/IEC 14543-3)

• Chinese Standard (GB/Z 20965)

• US Standard (ANSI/ASHRAE 135)

KNX is user-friendly and simple, the physicallayer is extremely easy to install with a remotepower supply network and a to tally open topol-ogy. One single KNX cable running throughoutthe building is all that is required to handle allthe appli cations. This cable also powers the KNX sensors.

For ease of identification, every module of theinstallation is identified by a selected address by means of either drum wheels, dip switches or keyboards with displays.

Bus, star, ring, tree or any other combi nationcan be installed as required, so this flexiblearchitecture makes the system easy to extend. If the premises or the fun ctions are modified,simply change the ad dress list or connect anadditional component to the bus.

The bus communication is based on a screenedtwisted pair cable design and is available in 1and 2 pair configurations as well as an LSNHversion for use in public areas.

0.8 mm (0.5 mm2 or AWG 20)Solid BC • PVC Insulation • 100% Foil Screen • Green PVC Jacket

KNX Reg. no. 109/7253/05

YE00819 EN 50090 1 Red/Black 328 100 8.4 3.8 0.012 0.3 0.043 1.1 0.217 5.5CEN/TC 247 500 500 46.3 21

3280 1000 89.3 40.5

YE00820 EN 50090 2 Red/Black 328 100 11.5 5.2 0.012 0.3 0.043 1.1 0.241 6.1CEN/TC 247 White/Yellow 500 500 61.7 28.0

3280 1000 122.3 55.5

Solid BC • PE Insulation • 100% Foil Screen • Green LSNH Jacket

KNX Reg. no. 109/7254/05

YE00905 IEC 60189-2 1 Red/Black 328 100 8.6 3.9 0.016 0.4 0.043 1.1 0.220 5.6IEC 60332-1 1624 500 47.4 21.5

3280 1000 91.5 41.5

YE00906 IEC 60189-2 2 Red/Black 328 100 12.3 5.6 0.016 0.4 0.043 1.1 0.282 6.3IEC 60332-1 White/Yellow 1624 500 68.3 31.0

3280 1000 131.1 59.5

Standard Unit Weight

lbs. kgPart No.

Standard Lengths

ft. m

ApplicableStandard(s)

No. of Pairs

ColorCode

Nominal OD

inch mm

InsulationThickness

inch mm

Outer JacketThickness

inch mm

Belden Technical Support +31 (0) 77 3875 414 www.belden-emea.com

©Copyright 2008, Belden Inc. NP 106E 12.0

8


SA/S x.16.1SA/S x.16.1

Switch Actuator, x-fold, 16 A, MDRCSA/S x.16.1, 2CDG 110 0xx R0011

66

Page 1 of 4SAS_x161_TD_EN_V1-22CDC 505 051 D0202

The 16 A AC1 Switch Actuators are modular installation devices in proM design for installation in the distribution board on 35 mm mounting rails. The connection to the ABB i-bus® EIB / KNX is implemented via Bus Connection Terminals.

The device does not require an additional power supply.

The actuators switch up to 8 indepen-dent electrical loads via potential free contacts.

The outputs are connected using screw terminals with combination drive head screws. Each output is controlled separately via the EIB / KNX.

The switch actuators can be manually operated via an operating element which simultaneously indicates the switch status.

The actuators are particularly suitable for switching ohmic loads.

Technical data

Power supply – Operating voltage 21...30 V DC, made available by the bus – Current consumption EIB / KNX < 12 mA – Power consumption EIB / KNX Max. 250 mW

Output nominal values – SA/S - type 2.16.1 4.16.1 8.16.1 12.16.1 – Number of contacts (potential free) 2 4 8 12 – Un rated voltage 250 / 440 V AC (50/60 Hz) – In rated current 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A – Power loss per device at max. load 2.0 W 4.0 W 8.0 W 10 W

Output switching currents – AC1 operation (cosϕ = 0.8) EN 60 947-4-1 16 A / 230 V – Fluorescent lighting load AX to 16 A / 250 V (70 μF) 2)

EN 60669-1 – Minimum switching performance 100 mA / 12 V 100 mA / 24 V – DC current switching capacity (ohmic load) 16 A / 24 V DC

Output life expectancy – Mechanical endurance > 3 x 106

Operations – Electrical endurance to IEC 60 947-4-1 (state change) – AC1 (240 V/cosϕ = 0.8) > 105

Output switching times 1) – Max. number of relay position changes per output and minute, 2.16.1 4.16.1 8.16.1 12.16.1 if all relays are switched simultaneously. The position changes should be distributed equally 60 30 15 10 within the minute. – Max. number of relay position changes per output, and minute if only one relay is switched 120 120 120 120

Connections – EIB / KNX Bus Connection Terminal, 0.8 mm Ø, single core – Load current circuits Screw terminal with universal head (PZ 1) 0.2...4 mm2 finely stranded, 2x (0.2 – 2.5 mm2) 0.2...6 mm2 single core, 2x (0.2 – 4 mm2) – cable shoe contact pin minimum 10 mm – Tightening torque Max. 0.8 Nm

Operating and display elements – Red LED and EIB / KNX push button for assignment of the physical address – Contact position indication Relay lever

Housing – IP 20 to EN 60 529

Safety class – II to EN 61 140

Isolation category – Overvoltage category III to EN 60 664-1 – Pollution degree 2 to EN 60 664-1

1) The specifications apply only after the bus voltage has been applied to the device for at least 30 seconds. The typical elementary delay of the relay is approx. 20 ms.

2) The maximum inrush-current peak (see table 2) may not be exceeded.

Table 1 – Part 1: 16 A Switch Actuator SA/S x.16.1, technical data

2CD

C 0

71 0

56 F

0005


SA/S x.16.1SA/S x.16.1


6 6


EIB / KNX voltage – SELV 24 V DC (safety extra low voltage)

Temperature range – Operation – 5 °C ... + 45 °C – Storage – 25 °C ... + 55 °C – Transport – 25 °C ... + 70 °C

Environment conditions – humidity max. 93 %, without bedewing

Design – Modular DIN-Rail Component (MDRC) Modular installation device, ProM – SA/S - type 2.16.1 4.16.1 8.16.1 12.16.1 – Dimensions (H x W x D) 90 x W x 64 – Width W in mm 36 72 144 216 – Mounting width (modules at 18 mm) 2 4 8 12 – Mounting depth in mm 64 64 64 64

Weight – In kg 0.15 0.25 0.46 0.65

Installation – On 35 mm mounting rail EN 60 715

Mounting position – As required

Housing, colour – Plastic housing, grey

Approvals – EIB / KNX nach EN 50 090-2-2 Certification

CE mark – In accordance with the EMC guideline and low voltage guideline

Lamp loads

Lamps – Incandescent lamp load 2330 W

Fluorescent lamp T5 / T8 – Uncompensated luminaire 2300 W – Parallel compensated 1500 W – DUO circuit 1500 W

Low-volt halogen lamps – Inductive transformer 1200 W – Electronic transformer 1500 W – Halogen lamp 230 V 2300 W

Dulux lamp – Uncompensated luminaire 1100 W – Parallel compensated 1100 W

Mercury-vapour lamp – Uncompensated luminaire 2000 W – Parallel compensated 2000 W

Switching performance (switching contact) – Max. peak inrush-current Ip (150 μs) 400 A – Max. peak inrush-current Ip (250 μs) 320 A – Max. peak inrush-current Ip (600 μs) 200 A

Number of electronic ballasts – 18 W (ABB EVG 1x58 CF ) 23(T5/T8, single element) 1) – 24 W (ABB EVG-T5 1x24 CY) 23 – 36 W (ABB EVG 1x36 CF) 14 – 58 W (ABB EVG 1x58 CF) 11 – 80 W (Helvar EL 1x80 SC) 10

1) For multiple element lamps or other types the number of electronic ballasts must be determined using the peak inrush current of the electronic ballasts.

Table 2: Lamp load for SA/S x.16.1

Application programs

Type Name Max. number of Max. number of Max. number of

communication objects group addresses associations

SA/S 2.16.1 Switch 2f 16A/2 34 254 254

SA/S 4.16.1 Switch 4f 16A/2 64 254 254

SA/S 8.16.1 Switch 8f 16A/2 124 254 254

SA/S 12.16.1 Switch 12f 16A/2 184 254 254

Table 3: Application programs SA/S x.16.1

Table 1 – Part 2: 16 A Switch Actuator SA/S x.16.1, technical data


SA/S x.16.1SA/S x.16.1


66


Wiring diagram

1 Label carrier 5 Contact position indicatior 2 Programming button and manual operation3 Programming LED 6 Load current circuits,4 Bus Connection Terminal per circuit 2 connection terminals

Note: All-pole disconnection must be observed in order to avoid dangerous contact voltage which can develop via loads in other phases.

Dimension drawings

�

� � � ��

�

��

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

� � � � � � � � ��

� � � � � � �

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

2CD

C 0

72 0

94 F

0005

2CD

C 0

72 1

01 F

0005

�

��

��

��

�

��

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

� � � � � � � ��

� � � � � � �

��

��

2CD

C 0

72 0

03 F

0005

Note: The programming requires the EIB Software Tool ETS2 V1.3 or higher. If the ETS3 is used a “.VD3” type file must be imported.

The application program is located within the ETS2 / ETS3 in the category ABB/output/Binary output, x-fold/switch, xf16/1 (x = 2, 4 or 8, number of outputs).

Detailed information about the application can be found in the product manual for the “Switch Actuators SA/S”. This manual can be free downloaded under www.abb.de/eib.

SA/S 2.16.1 SA/S 4.16.1 SA/S 8.16.1

B 36 mm2 module widths

72 mm 4 module widths

144 mm 8 module widths


SA/S x.16.1SA/S x.16.1


6 6



Switching with FeedbackThe new Switching Actuators

Sales information

Intelligent Installation Systems

8-Seiter Schaltaktor e 31.03.2005 14:19 Uhr Seite 1

2

Now current detection leaves the door

open for even greater intelligence in

intelligent installation systems.

Switching Actuators are used in any EIB

system. They perform actions and ensure

correct execution of sensor commands –

such as switching a lighting circuit.

The new ABB STOTZ-KONTAKT pro-

ducts represent a whole new generation

of Switching Actuators. For the first time

a current detection feature has been inte-

grated into the 16 A and 20 A line (2, 4 and

8 channels) – with significant effects on the

safety and economy of all buildings.

ABB i-bus® Switching Actuators:

It is hard to imagine modern building installations

without EIB / KNX building system technology.

Whether in office buildings, industrial buildings,

hotels, hospitals or private homes:

Modern building system technology offers greater

safety, efficiency, convenience and flexibility.


Detection means better monitoring and

better controlling…

Load current detection starting at 200 mA al-

lows for a range of specific functions in daily

use of the installed ABB i-bus®:

■ A significant failure of any equipment

is registered immediately. This also

applies to detection of circuit breaks

■ Current thresholds make operating

states visible

■ Continuous current monitoring

allows preventive detection of

failures/breakdowns

■ In combination with a counter,

operating hours can be recorded

in real time and actuating cycles

can be recorded

■ Maintenance and repair work can

be predicted and therefore scheduled

in advance

3

Switching with Feedback

…allowing you to act and react more efficiently


4

Further functions

Alongside all these features the devices

also offer further functions:

■ Forced operation and safety

functions

■ Reaction to threshold values

(underrange and overrange)

■ Control of electrothermal valve

actuators (continuous control)

■ Control of air conditioning devices

(fan coil units)

■ Selection of the preferred contact

position in the event of bus voltage

failure and recovery

With a single application program the

new generation of Switching Actuators

offers an extraordinary range of functions:

Current detection, current threshold

setting, time functions, switch-on/off

delay, staircase lighting automation,

scenes/presets, logic functions (AND,

OR, XOR) as well as status feedback

signals – it's all possible with the new

range of products.

Wide Range of Functions: A Single common Application with …

Continuous monitoring

Temporary increase

Temporary drop

Interruption

Switching operations


5

A complete product range...

The new product range offers com-

ponents from 2 to 12 outputs and from

6 A to 20 A. The devices are connected

with the EIB / KNX and do not need any

additional auxiliary power supply.

Each output in the 10 – 20 A range

has a manual operation possibility with

switch position display. The contact rating

in the product range has been increased.

The actuators now have AC3, AX,

C-load (200 µF) performance.

...with simplified installation

The use of a 6 mm terminal and a

Combi-Head-Screw make connecting

cables with large diameters and also

looping through much easier and faster.

… comprehensive Functionality

ABB i-bus®

Motor

Heating

Lighting

SA/S

Power infeed Cu

rre

nt

de

tec

tio

n

Cu

rre

nt

de

tec

tio

n


The Switching Actuators are suitable for fitting

in distribution boards or small housings for fast

attachment on 35 mm DIN rails. The electrical

connection is made via screw terminals.

The connection to the EIB / KNX is made using

the bus connection terminal.

6

The innovative Device Family

You can download a detailed description

of how to set parameters and start-up the

system at: www.abb.de/eib


7

The new Range of Switching Actuators

TypeDescriptio

n

Order Code

Weight/kg

Load Current detectio

n

bbn. 4016779 EAN

MW

Switch actuator, 6A-AC34fold, MDRC SA/S 4.6.1 2 2CDG110 036R0011 643849 0,13



Switch actuator, 10AX-AC12fold, MDRC SA/S 2.10.1 2 2CDG110 039R0011 644228 0,15







Switch actuator, 16AX-AC3, C-Load 2fold, w. current detection, MDRC SA/S 2.16.5S X 2 2CDG110 043R0011 644181 0,20

Switch actuator, 16AX-AC3, C-Load4fold, w. current detection, MDRC SA/S 4.16.5S X 4 2CDG110 044R0011 643832 0,34

Switch actuator, 16AX-AC3, C-Load8fold, w. current detection, MDRC SA/S 8.16.5S X 8 2CDG110 045R0011 644174 0,64

Switch actuator, 16AX-AC3, C-Load12fold, MDRC SA/S 12.16.5 12 2CDG110 046R0011 644167 0,80

Switch actuator, 20A-AC3, C-Load 2fold, w. current detection, MDRC SA/S 2.20.1S X 2 2CDG110 047R0011 644150 0,20

Switch actuator, 20A-AC3, C-Load4fold, w. current detection, MDRC SA/S 4.20.1S X 4 2CDG110 048R0011 644143 0,34

Switch actuator, 20A-AC3, C-Load8fold, w. current detection, MDRC SA/S 8.20.1S X 8 2CDG110 049R0011 644136 0,64

Switch actuator, 20A-AC3, C-Load12fold, MDRC SA/S 12.20.1 12 2CDG110 050R0011 644129 0,80


Dru

ck N

r. 2C

DC

505

055

B02

01

Sta

nd: 0

3 /

2005

Your EIB / KNX-Partner



SU/S 30.640.1SU/S 30.640.1

11

Page 1 of 4SUS_306401_TD_EN_V2-1

2CDC 501 023 D0203

Uninterruptible EIB / KNX Power Supply, 640 mA, MDRCSU/S 30.640.1, GH Q631 0049 R0111

The Uninterruptible EIB / KNX Power Supply produces and monitors the EIB / KNX system voltage. The bus line is decoupled from the power supply with the integrated choke.The power supply is connected to the bus line with a bus connection terminal. A reset is triggered by press-ing the reset push button and lasts for 20 seconds (regardless of the duration of the push button action). The bus line is disconnected from the power supply and the bus devices connected to this bus line are returned to their initial state. If the line should be dis connected for a longer period, the bus connection terminal must be removed from the power supply.Up to two 12 V sealed lead acid batteries can be connected as a back-up energy supply for the

EIB / KNX system voltage in the event of mains failures. The batteries are charged via the SU/S 30.640.1 during normal opera-tion. The charging voltage is tempera-ture-controlled using a temperature sensor. If a mains failure occurs, the SU/S 30.640.1 is then supplied by the batteries.The temperature sensor must

always be connected to ensure that

the battery is charged correctly!

A fault in the Uninterruptible EIB / KNX Power Supply is reported and stored via a potential-free change-over contact. The following faults cause a switching operation at the changeover contact: mains failure, bat-tery fault, overvoltage and overload or short circuit.

SK

003

7 B

02

Technical data

Power supply – Power supply– Power consumption– Power loss

230 V AC +10/–15%, 45 ... 65 Hz< 60 VA< 10 W

EIB / KNX output – Number– Output voltage– Nominal current– Sustained short-circuit current– Mains failure back-up time

(without connected battery)

1 line with integrated choke30 V DC +1/–2 V, SELV640 mA, short circuit proof< 1.5 A200 ms

Battery back-up

– Battery type– Number– Nominal voltage– Battery capacity– Mains failure back-up time– Nominal charging current of battery

– Temperature control

Sealed lead acid batteryMax. 2 in parallel12 V DCPreferably 1 Ah, 7 Ah, 12 Ah, 17 AhDependent on battery capacity650 mA (terminals 9 + 10), for battery capacities > 5 Ah150 mA (terminals 8 + 10)for battery capacities < 5 AhTemperature-controlled adjustment ofcharging voltage via temperature sensor

Potential-free changeover

contact

– Nominal voltage

– Max. switching current– Min. switching current

230 V AC or 12/24 V AC/DC6 A AC or 4 A DC100 mA (at U < 30 V AC/DC)

Operating and display elements – Green LED– Red LED– Reset push button

– Red LED– Green LED– Green LED

“ON“: output voltage is OK„I>Imax“: overload or short circuitReset starts when the push button is pressed and lasts 20 sReset at the EIB / KNX outputMain voltage is OKBattery is OK


SU/S 30.640.1SU/S 30.640.1

1 1


2CDC 501 023 D0203


Connections – Power supply– Battery connection– Temperature sensor– Changeover contact– Cable cross-section

for all screw terminals– EIB / KNX output

3 screw terminals2 screw terminals2 screw terminals3 screw terminalsmulti-core 0.2 – 2.5 mm2

single-core 0.2 – 4.0 mm2

Bus connection terminal (black/red)

Type of protection – IP 20, EN 60 529

Ambient temperature range – Operation– Storage– Transport

– 5 °C ... + 45 °C– 25 °C ... + 55 °C– 25 °C ... + 70 °C

Design – Modular installation device, proM

Housing, colour – Plastic housing, grey

Mounting – On 35 mm mounting rail, DIN EN 60 715

Dimensions – 90 x 144 x 64.5 mm (H x W x D)

Mounting depth/width – 68 mm/ 8 modules at 18 mm

Weight – 0.5 kg

Certification – EIB / KNX-certified

CE norm – In accordance with the EMC guideline and the low voltage guideline


SU/S 30.640.1SU/S 30.640.1

11


2CDC 501 023 D0203


Dimension drawing

Device connection

45

58

43.5 6.5

90

ABB i-bus®

EIBR

87 109 30V DC

Reset

5 6

μ

4

μL1 N

2 31

OKSU/S 30.640.1

30V DC230V AC

- 5 C. . .45 C

50 / 60 Hz

230V OK

12V

30V640 mA

ON I > ImaxOK

Code /650 mA150 mA

12V

144

ϑ

SK

003

6 Z

02

ABB i-bus®

EIBR

87 109 30V DC

Reset

5 6

μ

4

μL1 N

2 31

LN

LN

OK

9

6

7

13

12

4

8

2

5

1

3

14

SU/S 30.640.1

30V DC230V AC

- 5 C. . .45 C

50 / 60 Hz

230V OK

12V

30V640 mA

ON I > ImaxOK

11

10

C > 5Ah

12V

ϑ

Code /650 mA150 mA

SK

001

6 Z

02

1 Green LED (output voltage OK)2 Red LED (overload/short circuit)3 Label carrier4 Red LED (reset)5 Reset push button6 Green LED (mains voltage OK)7 Green LED (battery OK)

8 Bus connection terminal 9 Mains supply10 Battery connection “+”11 Battery “–” 650 mA/Temp. sensor “–”12 Battery “–” 150 mA/Temp. sensor “–”13 Connection for temperature sensor “+”14 Connection for potential-free

changeover contact

During normal operation, the poten-tial-free changeover contact is closed between terminals 4 and 5. In case of a fault, it is closed between terminals 5 and 6.If a total battery capacity of less than 5 Ah is connected to the Uninterruptible EIB / KNX Power Supply SU/S 30.640.1, the battery is connect-ed to terminals 8 (“150 mA –”) and 10 (“12 V +”) while the temperature sensor is connected to terminals 7 (“ϑ”) and 9 (“Code/650 mA –”).

Note If a total battery capacity of more than 5 Ah is used, the battery is connected to terminals 9 (“Code/650 mA –”) and 10 (“12 V +”) while the temperature sensor is connected to terminals 7 (“ϑ”) and 8 (“150 mA”).If a battery is used, the temperature sensor must always be connected!


SU/S 30.640.1SU/S 30.640.1

1 1


2CDC 501 023 D0203


Installation and

commissioning

Switch on the mains voltage once the device has been correctly installed. The green “ON” LED and the green “230 V OK” LED light up. If a battery is connected, the green “Battery OK” LED also lights up. All the other LEDs are switched off. The device is func-tioning correctly.

The battery test is carried out automati-cally at 15 minute intervals. It can take up to 15 minutes after switching on the mains voltage until a possible battery fault is indicated. It can also take 15 minutes for the “Battery OK” LED to relight up once the cause of the fault has been rectified.

A battery test can be triggered manu-ally by pressing the reset push button. In this case, a reset is always carried out simultaneously.

If a faulty battery is connected or the polarity of the battery connection is reversed, the green “ON” LED for the battery flashes.

May 2007 2 - 1

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

Contents

Technical data 2 - 2

Application programs (List) 2 - 3

Circuit diagrams 2 - 3

in combination with Bus coupler FM (6120-102-500):Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring Threshold /1 2 - 4

in combination with Switch actuator/sensor FM (6110 U-101-500):Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring Threshold /2 2 - 10

Watchdog sensor 180 comfort with multi-lens, FMType: 6122-xx-500

2 - 2 May 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

The watchdog sensor application mo-dule is placed on a flush-mounted buscoupler or switch actuator/sensor.

In addition to motion detection, the sen-sor can pick up movement within a cer-tain period using its integrated monito-ring function. It is therefore possible tointegrate the sensor in event signallingsystems.

The movement detector also has aphoto-electric sensor function. Thisfunction triggers telegrams when thebrightness level exceeds or falls belowset values.

Using a slide switch, the movement de-tector can switch between the threeoperating modes ON / AUTOMATIC /OFF. The switch can be locked in theneutral position using the screw supp-lied.

The recovery time and the sensitivity ofthe integrated photo-electric switch canbe set using the two potentiometers atthe back of the movement detector orvia the parameters in ETS.

It is also available with a multi-lens andmodified detection range (see dia-gram).

Watchdog sensor 180 comfort with multi-lens, FMType: 6122-xx-500

Technical data

Power supply – EIB 24 V DC, via the bus lineOperating and display elements – Slide switch

– Potentiometer Photo-electric sensor 5 … 1000 Lx– Potentiometer Recovery time 10 s … 17 min

Connections – Flush-mounted bus coupler or 10-pole plug connector– Flush-mounted switch actuator/sensor

Type of protection – IP 20, EN 60 529mounted on the bus coupler

Ambient temperature range – Operation - 5 °C … 45 °C– Storage -25 °C … 55 °C– Transport -25 °C … 70 °C

Design / colour – solo® savanna / ivorydavos / studio whitemanhatten / graphitesamoa / light greentoscana / crimsonattica / blue-grey

– future savanna / ivorydavos / studio whitemanhatten / graphitestone / light grey

– carat anthracitesavanna / ivorydavos / studio white

Mounting – latched onto flush-mounted unitDimensions – 63 x 63 mm (H x W)Weight – 0.04 kgCertification – EIB-certifiedCE norm – in accordance with the EMC guideline

and the low voltage guideline

Normal detection range Detection range with multi-lens

May 2007 2 - 3

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX Watchdog sensor 180 comfort with multi-lens, FMType: 6122-xx-500

Circuit diagram4

1

2 5

3 6

1 Bus cable 4 Adapter for adjustments2 Bus terminal 5 Slide switch3 Flush-mounted bus coupler 6 Application module


For flush-mounted bus coupler:Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring Threshold /1 12 21 21

For flush-mounted switch actuator/sensor:Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring Threshold /2 12 21 21

2 - 4 May 2007


��

�

Switch Value Cyclic MonitoringThreshold /1

Selection in ETS


Movement

Using this application program, themovement detector can pick up move-ment in its detection range and sendswitching or value telegrams.

When assigning parameters, it shouldbe noted that some parameters areonly visible when “High Access” is sel-ected and can only be modified at thispoint.

The setting of the threshold for the lightsensor as well as the recovery time canbe carried out using the potentiometerat the back of the movement detector.There is also a separate setting aid.Alternatively, the settings can be car-ried out in ETS. To do this, the parame-ter settings should be changed from“Potentiometer” to “ETS”. With the pa-rameter “Threshold”, it is possible toindicate which brightness value triggersthe movement detector. The value “0”means dark while “255” means maxi-mum brightness. The recovery time canbe set with the two parameters “Timebase of recovery time” and “Time factorof recovery time”. The base and factorare multiplied to produce the recoverytime:

Recovery time = Base * Factor

The operating mode of the movementdetector can be set via the slide switch.If the slide switch is moved into position“1”, the movement detector sends a “1”to its communication object “Movement/ Telegr. switch”. If it is moved into posi-tion “0”, it sends a “0”. The modifiedoperating mode is thus transferred onthe bus. In both cases, the monitoringfunction is inactive.

The current status of the slide switch issent on the bus via the object “Move-ment / Activation”. It is therefore gua-ranteed that other movement detectorsassume the operating mode simultane-ously.

Switch

The movement detector sends swit-ching telegrams to the communicationobject “Movement / Telegr. switch”when it picks up some movement in itsdetection range. The value of the swit-ching telegram can be set with the pa-rameter “Sending at detection”.

It is possible to send an “ON telegram”,an “OFF telegram” or “no telegram”when movement is detected. The “ON”or “OFF” telegrams can also be sentcyclically.

If the movement detector senses nofurther movement once the recoverytime has elapsed, it is possible to sendan “ON telegram”, an “OFF telegram”or “no telegram”. The “ON” or “OFF”telegrams can also be sent cyclically inthis case. This is determined with theparameter “Telegram after recoverytime”.

It is also possible to disable the move-ment detector. The communication ob-ject “Movement / Activation” is used forthis. It is visibly switched with the para-meter “Activation object movement”.

The movement detector is activated ordeactivated if a telegram is received atthis object. With the parameter “At ...movement”, it can be set whether an“ON telegram”, an “OFF telegram” or“no telegram” is sent once via the com-munication object “Movement / Telegr.switch”.

Example:In a functional building, all the move-ment detectors are enabled in themorning at a specific time. To do this, a“1” is sent with a time switch to the con-trol centre and received at the commu-nication object “Movement / Activation”.In this example, the parameter “Enab-ling movement at” is set to “ON tele-gram”.

Value

It is also possible to send values whenmovement is detected. To do this, theparameter “Type of movement object”must be changed to “Value (EIS 6)”.Dimming actuators can for example bedimmed to a value that is smaller thanthe maximum value.

The parameter settings “Sending at thebeginning/end of the detection”, deter-mine the size of the value that is sent.The option “no telegram” can also beselected.

May 2007 2 - 5


Cyclic

All switching telegrams can also besent cyclically. It should be ensuredthat the setting “ON telegram cyclically“or “OFF telegram cyclically” is selectedin the respective parameter.

The total cyclic time can be set with theparameters “Time base for cyclical sen-ding” and “Time factor for cyclic sen-ding”.

The cyclic sending interval for a tele-gram is calculated by combining thebase and factor:

Cyclic time = Base * Factor

Monitoring

Note:The Monitoring function does not serveto create a VdS certified alarm system.It offers the possibility to use the EIB/KNX-system to control rooms. It is notan alternative for an alarm system.

It is possible to activate a monitoringfunction. To do so, the general parame-ter “Monitoring function” must be set to“yes”. The monitoring function is nottriggered at the slightest thermal move-ment but only if a strong energy sourceis registered during a short interval orseveral weak sources over a longerperiod.

If the monitoring function is activated, afurther communication object “Signal –Telegr. switch …” is available. Thepresence detector records the numberand intensity of movements within atime period and only sends telegramsonce a specific sensitivity level hasbeen exceeded.

On a further “Monitoring function” tab, itis possible to set the type of the moni-toring object (1 bit or 1 byte) and thetype of telegram at the start of detec-tion dependent on the intensity andcyclical sending behaviour.

The parameter “Threshold” indicatesthe level of sensitivity. The value “1”means maximum sensitivity while thevalue “255” means minimum sensitivi-ty.

It can also be parameterised at whichpoint the detector is in monitoringmode after activation. This period iscomposed of a base and factor in asimilar way to the cyclical time.

If the monitoring function should beenabled externally, this can be carriedout with the communication object ”Si-gnal – Activation”. To do so, the para-meter “Activation object monitoring”must previously be set to “available”.

Pull off detection

Pull off detection represents a furthersecurity function. If the movement de-tector is removed from the bus/mainscoupler, it sends a “0” via its communi-cation object “Pull off detection / Telegr.switch”. It is therefore possible to detectany possible tampering by thieves.

Photo-electric sensor

It is also possible to activate a photo-electric sensor function. The generalparameter “Photo-electric sensor” mustbe set to “yes”.

On a further parameter page “Photo-electric sensor”, the type of the objectcan be set (1 bit or 1 byte) togetherwith the value that is sent when the lo-wer or upper threshold is reached aswell as the cyclical sending behaviour.

With the parameter “Ignore artificial li-ght”, it is determined whether the mo-vement detector only reacts to daylightor not.

The parameters “Lower threshold” or“Upper threshold” indicate when thetelegrams should be sent by the phot-electric sensor. The value “0” meansdark while “255” means maximumbrightness.

If the photo-electric sensor function isto enabled externally, this can be car-ried out with the communication object“Photo-electric sensor / Activation”. Theparameter “Activation object photo-electric sensor” must previously be setto “available”.

2 - 6 May 2007



Communication objectswith sending of value telegrams

Communication objectswith activation object and brightness-dependent switching activation object

Communication objectswith monitoring, photo-electric sensorand activation objects

Communication objectswith monitoring and photo-electricsensor values and activation objects

No. Type Object name Function0 1 bit Pull off detection Telegr. switch1 1 bit Movement Telegr. switch

No. Type Object name Function0 1 bit Pull off detection Telegr. switch1 1 byte Movement Telegr. value

No. Type Object name Function…

2 1 bit Movement Activation3 1 bit Brightness dependent Activation

switching


5 1 bit Signal Telegr. switch6 1 bit Signal Activation

10 1 bit Photo-electric sensor Telegr. switch11 1 bit Photo-electric sensor Activation


5 1 byte Signal Telegr. value6 1 bit Signal Activation

10 1 byte Photo-electric sensor Telegr. value11 1 bit Photo-electric sensor Activation

May 2007 2 - 7


Movement detector parameters with low access:– Activation object movement not available

availableonly if “available” is selected:

– Enabling movement at ON telegramOFF telegram

– At disabling the movement do not send a telegramsend ON telegram oncesend OFF telegram once

– At enabling the movement do not send a telegramsend ON telegram oncesend OFF telegram once

– Type of movement object Switching (EIS 1)– Sending at detection ON telegram

OFF telegramON telegram cyclicallyOFF telegram cyclicallyno telegram

– Telegram after recovery time ON telegramOFF telegramON telegram cyclicallyOFF telegram cyclicallyno telegram

– Time base for cyclical sending 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min– Time factor for cyclic sending 100Additional parameters for high access:General:– Monitoring function yes

noonly if “yes” is selected:

Monitoring function:– Activation object monitoring not available


– Enabling monitoring function at ON telegramOFF telegram

– Type of monitoring object Switching (EIS 1)Value (EIS 6)

only if “Switching (EIS 1)” is selected:– Sending at the beginning of ON telegram

detection OFF telegramON telegram cyclicallyOFF telegram cyclicallyno telegram

– Sending at the end of detection ON telegramOFF telegramON telegram cyclicallyOFF telegram cyclicallyno telegram

– Time base for cyclical sending 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min– Time factor for cyclic sending 100

only if “Value (EIS 6)” is selected:– Sending at the beginning of 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF /

detection no telegram– Sending at the end of detection 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF /

no telegram– No alarm sends 0– Threshold 4

(1: sensitive / 255: insensitive)– Time base till watch dog is in 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /

monitoring function 9 min– Time factor till watch dog is in 35

monitoring function

Parameters for “Low Access”The default setting for the valuesis printed in bold type.

Parameters for “High Access”The default setting for the valuesis printed in bold type.

2 - 8 May 2007


– Photo-electric sensor yesno

only if “yes” is selected:Photo-electric sensor:– Activation object photo-electric not available

sensor availableonly if “available” is selected:

– Enabling threshold sensor at ON telegramOFF telegram

– Ignore artificial light yesno

– Type of threshold object Switching (EIS 1)Value (EIS 6)

only if “Switching (EIS 1)” is selected:– Sending at upper threshold ON telegram


– Sending at lower threshold ON telegramOFF telegramON telegram cyclicallyOFF telegram cyclicallyno telegram


only if “Value (EIS 6)” is selected:– Sending at upper threshold 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF /

no telegram– Sending at lower threshold 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF /

no telegram– Lower threshold: 10

(0: dark / 255: bright)– Upper threshold 200

(0: dark / 255: bright)Behaviour at bus recovery:(communication objects)– Brightness dependent switching enabled

disabled– Movement enabled

disabledMovement detector:– Activation object brightness not available

dependent switching available– Type of movement object Switching (EIS 1)

Value (EIS 6)only if “Switching (EIS1)” is selected:

– Sending at detection ON telegramOFF telegramON telegram cyclicallyOFF telegram cyclicallyno telegram



only if “Value (EIS 6)” is selected:– Sending at detection 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF /

no telegram– Telegram after recovery time 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF /

no telegram


May 2007 2 - 9


Adjustments:– Threshold of light sensor is Potentiometer

adjustable with ETSonly if “ETS” is selected:

– Threshold 100(0: dark / 255: bright)

– Recovery time adjustable with PotentiometerETS

only if “ETS” is selected:– Potentiometer should not be at TEST– Time base of recovery time 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /

9 min– Time factor of recovery time 100

Parameters for “High Access”The default settings for the valuesis printed in bold type

2 - 10 May 2007


��

�

Switch Value Cyclic MonitoringThreshold /2

Selection in ETS


Movement for 1 SA

The application program is intended forthe movement detector combined withthe flush-mounted switch actuator/ sen-sor.

Using this application program, the mo-vement detector can pick up movementin its detection range and send swit-ching or value telegrams.

When assigning parameters, it shouldbe noted that some parameters areonly visible when “High Access” is sel-ected and can only be modified at thispoint.

The setting of the threshold for the lightsensor as well as the recovery time canbe carried out using the potentiometerat the back of the movement detector.There is also a separate setting aid.Alternatively, the settings can be car-ried out in ETS. To do this, the parame-ter settings should be changed from“Potentiometer” to “ETS”. With the pa-rameter “Threshold”, it is possible toindicate which brightness value triggersthe movement detector. The value “0”means dark while “255” means maxi-mum brightness. The recovery time canbe set with the two parameters “Timebase of recovery time” and “Time factorof recovery time”. The base and factorare multiplied to produce the recoverytime:


The operating mode of the movementdetector can be set via the slide switch.If the slide switch is moved into position“1”, the movement detector sends a “1”to its communication object “Movement/ Telegr. switch”. If it is moved into posi-tion “0”, it sends a “0”. The modifiedoperating mode is thus transferred onthe bus. In both cases, the monitoringfunction is inactive.

The current status of the slide switch issent on the bus via the object “Move-ment / Activation”. It is therefore gua-ranteed that other movement detectorsassume the operating mode simultane-ously.

Switch

The movement detector sends swit-ching telegrams to the communicationobject “Movement / Telegr. switch”when it picks up some movement in itsdetection range.

The value of the switching telegramcan be set with the parameter “Sendingat detection”. It is possible to send an“ON telegram”, an “OFF telegram” or“no telegram”. The “ON” or “OFF” tele-grams can also be sent cyclically.

If the movement detector senses nofurther movement once the recoverytime has elapsed, it is possible to sendan “ON telegram”, an “OFF telegram”or “no telegram”. The “ON” or “OFF”telegrams can also be sent cyclically inthis case. This is determined with theparameter “Telegram after recoverytime”.

It is also possible to disable the move-ment detector. The communication ob-ject “Movement / Activation” is used forthis. It is visibly switched with the para-meter “Activation object movement”.

The movement detector is activated ordeactivated if a telegram is received atthis object. With the parameter “At ...movement”, it can be set whether an“ON telegram”, an “OFF telegram” or“no telegram” is sent once via the com-munication object “Movement / Telegr.switch”.

Example:In a functional building, all the move-ment detectors are enabled in themorning at a specific time. To do this, a“1” is sent with a time switch to the con-trol centre and received at the commu-nication object “Movement / Activation”.In this example, the parameter “Enab-ling movement at” is set to “ON tele-gram”.

Value

It is also possible to send values whenmovement is detected. To do this, theparameter “Type of movement object”must be changed to “Value (EIS 6)”.Dimming actuators can for example bedimmed to a value that is smaller thanthe maximum value.

The parameter settings “Sending at thebeginning/end of the detection” deter-mine the size of the value that is sent.The option “no telegram” can also beselected.

May 2007 2 - 11


Cyclic

All switching telegrams can also besent cyclically. It should be ensuredthat the setting “ON telegram cyclically”or “OFF telegram cyclically” is selectedin the respective parameter.

The total cyclic time can be set with theparameters “Time base for cyclical sen-ding” and “Time factor for cyclic sen-ding”.

The cyclic sending interval for a tele-gram is calculated by combining thebase and factor:

Cyclic time = Base * Factor

Monitoring








Pull off detection

Pull off detection represents a furthersecurity function. If the movement de-tector is removed from the bus/mainscoupler, it sends a “0” via its communi-cation object “Pull off detection / Telegr.switch”. It is therefore possible to detectany possible tampering by thieves.

Photo-electric sensor

It is also possible to activate a photo-electric sensor function. The generalparameter “Photo-electric sensor” mustbe set to “yes”.

On a further parameter page “Photo-electric sensor”, the type of the objectcan be set (1 bit or 1 byte) togetherwith the value that is sent when the lo-wer or upper threshold is reached aswell as the cyclical sending behaviour.

With the parameter “Ignore artificial li-ght”, it is determined whether the mo-vement detector only reacts to daylightor not.

The parameters “Lower threshold” or“Upper threshold” indicate when thetelegrams should be sent by the photo-electric sensor. The value “0” meansdark while “255” means maximumbrightness.

If the photo-electric sensor function isto be enabled externally, this can becarried out with the communication ob-ject “Photo-electric sensor / Activation”.The parameter “Activation object pho-to-electric sensor” must previously beset to “available”.

2 - 12 May 2007


Communication objectswith activation object

Communication objectswith sending of value telegrams andstatus response

Communication objectswith brightness-dependent switchingactivation object

Communication objectswith monitoring, photo-electric sensorand activation objects

Communication objectswith monitoring and photo-electricsensor values and activation objects

No. Type Object name Function0 1 bit Pull off detection Telegr. switch1 1 bit Movement Telegr. switch2 1 bit Movement Activation7 1 bit Output Switch

No. Type Object name Function0 1 bit Pull off detection Telegr. switch1 1 byte Movement Telegr. value

…7 1 bit Output Switch8 1 bit Output Status


3 1 bit Brightness dependent Activationswitching

…



10 1 bit Photo-electric sensor Telegr. switch11 1 bit Photo-electric sensor Activation



10 1 byte Photo-electric sensor Telegr. value11 1 bit Photo-electric sensor Activation

Relay

The relay can be selected as a normal-ly open contact or normally closed con-tact for various applications.

The relay output has its own communi-cation object available “Output /Switch”. The relay output can thus beswitched via the EIB independently ofthe movement detector. If the relay is tobe controlled by the movement detec-tor, the communication objects “Move-ment / Telegr. switch” and “Output /Switch” must be linked with a commongroup address.

In normal mode, the relay output canalso be assigned switch ON andswitch OFF delays. These delays arecalculated by combining a base andfactor.

In the staircase lighting mode, there isa switch ON delay available as in nor-mal mode. The period of the staircaselighting function is assigned via a baseand factor.

The actuator can send its status on theEIB. To do so, the parameter “Statusresponse” must be set to “yes”. In thiscase the communication object “Output/ Status” is available. If the value “1” issent, this means that the relay has pik-ked up.

May 2007 2 - 13


Movement detector parameters with low access:– Contact on bus voltage recovery ON

OFFMovement detector:– Activation object movement not available

availableonly if “available is selected”:

– Enabling movement at ON telegramOFF telegram

– At disabling the movement do not send a telegramsend ON telegram oncesend OFF telegram once

– At enabling the movement do not send a telegramsend ON telegram oncesend OFF telegram once

– Type of movement object Switching (EIS1)– Sending at detection ON telegram



– Time base for cyclical sending 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min– Time factor for cyclic sending 100Output:– Operating mode Normal operation

Staircase lighting function– Switch ON delay yes


– Time base for switch ON delay 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /9 min

– Factor for switch ON delay 10(1 … 255)only for “normal operation”:

– Switch OFF delay yesno

only if “yes” is selected:– Time base for switch OFF delay 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /

9 min– Factor for switch OFF delay 10

(1 … 255)only for “staircase lighting function”:

– Time base for staircase lighting 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /function 9 min

– Factor for staircase lighting function 10(1 … 255)

– Status response yesno

– Relay is normally open contactnormally closed contact

Parameters for “Low Access”The default setting for the valuesis printed in bold type.

2 - 14 May 2007


Additional parameters for high access:General:– Monitoring function yes


Monitoring function:– Activation object monitoring not available


– Enabling monitoring function at ON telegramOFF telegram

– Type of monitoring object Switching (EIS 1)Value (EIS 6)

only if “Switching (EIS 1)” is selected:– Sending at the beginning of ON telegram

detection OFF telegramON telegram cyclicallyOFF telegram cyclicallyno telegram



only if “Value (EIS 6)” is selected:– Sending at the beginning of 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF /

detection no telegram– Sending at the end of detection 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF /

no telegram– No alarm sends 0– Threshold 4

(1: sensitive / 255: insensitive)– Time base till watch dog is in 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /

monitoring function 9 min– Time base till watch dog is in 150

monitoring function– Photo-electric sensor yes


Photo-electric sensor:– Activation object photo-electric not available

sensor availableonly if “available” is selected:

– Enabling threshold sensor at ON telegramOFF telegram

– Ignore artificial light yes / no– Type of threshold object Switching (EIS 1)

Value (EIS 6)only if “Switching (EIS 1)” is selected:

– Sending at upper threshold ON telegramOFF telegramON telegram cyclicallyOFF telegram cyclicallyno telegram

– Sending at lower threshold ON telegramOFF telegramON telegram cyclicallyOFF telegram cyclicallyno telegram



May 2007 2 - 15


only if “Value (EIS 6)” is selected:– Sending at upper threshold 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF /

no telegram– Sending at lower threshold 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF /

no telegram– Lower threshold: 100

(0: dark / 255: bright)– Upper threshold 200

(0: dark / 255: bright)Behaviour at bus recovery:(communication objects)– Brightness dependent switching enabled

disabled– Movement enabled

disabled– Contact on bus voltage recovery ON

OFFMovement detector:– Activation object brightness not available

dependent switching available– Type of movement object Switching (EIS 1)

Value (EIS 6)only if “Switching (EIS 1)” is selected:

– Sending at detection ON telegramOFF telegramON telegram cyclicallyOFF telegram cyclicallyno telegram


– Time base for cyclical sending 130 s / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min– Time factor for cyclic sending 100

only if “Value (EIS 6)” is selected:– Sending at detection 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF /

no telegram– Telegram after recovery time 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF /

no telegramAdjustments:– Threshold of light sensor is Potentiometer

adjustable with ETSonly if “ETS” is selected:

– Threshold 100(0: dark / 255: bright)

– Recovery time adjustable with PotentiometerETS

only if “ETS” is selected:– Potentiometer should not be at TEST– Time base of recovery time 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /

9 min– Time factor of recovery time 100


2 - 2 March 2003

ABB i-bus® EIB

The application module 4-fold switchsensor solo® is placed on a flush-moun-ted bus coupler, switch actuator orswitch/dimming actuator.

The 4-fold switch sensor solo® can sende.g. switching, dimming or shutter controltelegrams to EIB actuators.

Additional the sensor can be used forstorage and/or send out of lightscenes.

The switch sensor has two contacts un-der the rocker and a light-emitting diodewhich can light up red or green.

In addition, a cover frame in the chosencolour in either the Solo or future designis required together with a flush-mountedbus coupler and a bus connecting termi-nal.

4-fold multifunction switch sensor solo®, FMType: 6127MF-xx

Technical Data

Power supply – EIB 24 V DC, via the bus lineOperating and display elements – 4 rocker, each with 2 push button contacts

– 4 x two-colour LED red / greenConnections – Bus coupler FM (6120 U-102-500) 10-pole plug connector

– Switch actuator FM (6110 U-101-500)– Switch/dimming actuator FM (6114 U-500)

Type of protection – IP 20, EN 60 529,placed on a flush-mounted insert

Ambient temperature range – Operation - 5 °C … 45 °C– Storage - 25 °C … 55 °C– Transport - 25 °C … 70 °C

Design – solo® – futureColour – savanna / ivory – savanna / ivory

davos / studio white davos / studio whitemanhatten / graphite manhatten / graphitesamoa / light green stone / light greytoscana / crimson redattica / blue-grey

Mounting – latched onto flush-mounted insertDimensions – 63 x 63 mm (H x W)Weight – 0.04 kgCertification – EIB-certifiedCE norm – in accordance with the EMC guideline and

the low voltage guideline

0073-1-7040

March 2003 2 - 3

ABB i-bus® EIB 4-fold multifunction switch sensor solo®, FMType: 6127MF-xx

Circuit diagram

1 4

2 5

3

1 Bus cable 4 Application module2 Bus terminal 5 10-pole plug3 Bus coupler FM

Anwendungsprogramme Anzahl max. Anzahl max. AnzahlKommunikationsobjekte Gruppenadressen Zuordnungen

For Bus coupler FM,Switch actuator/sensor FM andSwitch/dimming actuator FM:

Switch sensor 4f MF TP/1 22 22 22

Operation with the various flush-mounted devices is defined on the “General” parameter page. If the switch sensor has been placedonto a flush-mounted switch actuator or switch/dimming actuator, it is not necessary to insert a further device from the database inETS2.

2 - 4 March 2003


Switch sensor 4f MF TP/1

Selection in ETS2

– ABBPush button solo

Push button, 4-fold

�

The 4-fold multifunction switch sensorSolo can be placed on a flush-mounted bus coupler, switch actuatoror a switch/dimming actuator. Therespective flush-mounted device onwhich the switch sensor Solo has beenplaced, must be set first of all on theparameter page “BCU type”. Only thenare the parameters for the variousflush-mounted actuators enabled inthe ETS2 program.

The following section describes thefunctions of the rocker. These functionsare always identical, regardless of theflush-mounted device that is used.

Switch sensor

If the operation mode of the rocker isdefined as “Switch sensor”, the switchsensor sends “ON” or “OFF” telegramsvia the relevant 1 bit object “Rocker -Switch”.

In the default setting, the switch sensorsends “TOGGLE” telegrams when theright or left rocker is pressed. Thismeans that an “ON” command is sentfirst followed by an “OFF” commandafter a push button action and then an“ON” command if the rocker is pressedagain.

Via the parameter “Working mode ofrocker”, the rockers can also be set sothat the right rocker sends “ON”commands and the left rocker sends“OFF” commands or vice versa.

Dimming sensor

In the operation mode “Dimmingsensor”, an “ON” or “OFF” command issent to the 1 bit communication object“Rocker - Switch” when one of therockers is pressed briefly. If the rockeris pressed for a longer period, theswitch sensor sends commands fordimming brighter or darker to the 4 bitobject “Rocker - Dimming”. If the rockeris released after a long push buttonaction, the switch sensor sends thecommand “Stop dimming”.

In the default setting, the switch sensorsends “TOGGLE” telegrams after ashort operation of the right or leftrocker. A long operation of the leftrocker dims down the brightness levelwhile a long operation of the rightrocker dims up the brightness level.

This behaviour is adapted if requiredvia the parameter “Working mode ofrocker”.

Shutter sensor

In the operation mode “Shuttersensor”, the switch sensor has the 1 bitcommunication objects “Move shutter”and “Adjust shutter”. After a longoperation of the rocker, the switchsensor sends telegrams to theconnected shutter actuators to raise orlower the shutter. After a shortoperation, it sends telegrams to stopthe shutter movement or for louvreadjustment.

The setting “Working mode of rocker”defines whether the shutter is raised orlowered after operation of the right orleft rocker.

Flexible assignment

With the application “Flexibleassignment”, the right and the left sideof the rocker of the switch sensor eachhave their own 1 bit communicationobject “Rocker - Switch” available. It ispossible to send “ON”, “OFF” or“TOGGLE” telegrams on the EIB viathis object.

Each pulse edge of the rockers cantherefore be set individually. The switchsensor can thus be adapted to a widevariety of applications. If e.g. inchingmode should be implemented, thesetting “rising = ON, falling = OFF”should be selected.

With the parameter setting “noreaction”, it is possible to completelydeactivate a rocker.

LED

The relevant LED of the rocker candisplay the current status of the object“Rocker ...” or serve as an orientationlight.

If the LED is used for status display, thecolour changes when the object valuechanges. It can freely selected whetherthe LED lights up “green” or “red” inthe OFF state or “red” or “green” in theON state.

The LED can light up “green” or “red”as an orientation light.

March 2003 2 - 5


On the parameter page “Status LED”, itis possible to enable a further 1 bitcommunication object “Status LED -Switch”. It is now possible to activate ordeactivate the status LEDs via thisobject with an “ON” command. Thismeans that the LED changes colour orserves as an orientation light only if theobject “Status LED - Switch” has thevalue “1” (a “0”), as defined in therocker settings.

Example:In a bedroom (hotel room), theoccupant could be disturbed duringthe night by the status LEDs of theswitch sensor Solo. The function of thestatus LEDs can be deactivated from22:00 onwards via the object “StatusLED - Switch” by means of a timeswitch.

Lightscene sensor

In the operation mode “Lightscenesensor”, the switch sensor sends a1 byte value via the relevant object“Rocker ... - Lightscene number”. Thisvalue is assigned to a specificlightscene. 8 different lightscenes per4-fold switch sensor can be stored andretrieved.

If two lightscenes are stored in theswitch sensor, it is possible to recallthe lightscene via a 1 bit object. Switchsensors without multifunctions canthus be integrated into lightscenecontrol. The toggling of the bit size iscarried out via the setting “Lightsceneretrieval”.

Two different lightscenes per rockercan be stored and recalled. Theparameter setting “Recall lightscenenumber for left push button” and“Recall lightscene number for rightpush button” specifies whichlightscene is recalled by the respectivepush button.

If the common group address is linkedwith a “Lightscene number” object of arocker of another 4-fold multifunctionswitch sensor, two lightscenes canalso be retrieved by this rocker. Aprerequisite is that the application‘Lightscene sensor” has been set forthis rocker as well as the correctlightscene number.

It is important that the lightscenenumbers that have been set for arocker are also set on the “Lightscene”parameter page as this is the only waythat the lightscene number that is sentby the rocker can recall thecorresponding lightscene in the switchsensor.

The lightscene is saved via a longpush button action, provided that theparameter “Store lightscenes via longpush button action” has been setaccordingly. All the actuators aredimmed or switched to the requiredbrightness value before saving thescene. A long operation (approx. 4 s)takes place of the left or right pushbutton of the rocker which shouldrecall the corresponding lightscene.

Note:To save the lightscenes, the read flag(R flag) must be set in thecorresponding communication objectsof the actuators.

The status LED of the correspondingrocker flashes while the lightscene isbeing saved.

If the lightscene storage should becarried out in the switch sensor Solo,the parameter “Lightscenes stored inthe device” should be activated.

The parameter “Lightscene number forlightscene ...” defines whichlightscenes can be saved by the switchsensor. A maximum of 8 lightscenesper EIB-Solo multifunction switchsensor can be stored. The number oflightscenes is specified with the setting“Number of lightscenes”. If morelightscenes are required, a further EIB-Solo multifunction switch sensor mustbe used. If an additional switch sensoris used, the parameters “Lightscenenumber” must be changed accordinglyso that the same lightscenes are notused twice.

The “Lightscene number” object of therocker (e.g. object no. 14) is linked with“Lightscene - Number” object no. 8 viaa common group address. If the groupaddress of the “Lightscene - Number”object (no. 8) is received, it sendstelegrams to switch or dimmingactuators via the objects “Actuatorgroup A” to “Actuator group E”.The actuator groups can be set as 1 bitor 1 byte.

2 - 6 March 2003


The preselection of the lightscene valu-es is carried out on the “Lightscene ...”parameter page. This can be “OFF/UP”or “ON/DOWN” for1 bit values. In the case of 1 bytevalues, it can be set between 0% and100% in steps of 10%.

Switch sensor value

The operation mode “Switch sensorvalue” causes the switch sensor tosend 1 byte value telegrams via therelevant object “Rocker - Value”.

By default, the value “1” is sent whenthe left rocker is pressed while thevalue “0” is sent when the right rockeris pressed.

The values that should be sent can bedefined via the parameters “Left pushbutton sends value” and “Right pushbutton sends value”. These values canrange between 0 and 255.

It is thus possible e.g. to switch on adimming actuator with a specificbrightness value or if it is alreadyswitched on, to change the brightnesslevel to a specific value.

LED (for switch sensor value)

In the operation mode “Switch sensorvalue”, the status LED of the respectiverocker displays the current status of thevalue object. If a telegram with a value> “1” is sent or received, the LED lightsup red. If a telegram with the value “0”is received, it lights up green. Thisbehaviour can be inverted via theparameter “Colour of the LED”.

Alternatively, the LED can also serveas an orientation light. To do so, theparameter “Colour of the LED” must beset accordingly.

Actuator functions

The following section describes theactuator functions of the flush-mountedswitch actuator and the switch/dimming actuator.

Switch actuator FM (6110 U-101-500)

The switch actuator has a 1 bitcommunication object “Output -Switch” which is used to switch therelay. In the default setting, the outputswitches on following the receipt of atelegram with the value “1” andswitches off after a telegram with thevalue “0”. If the parameter “Behaviour ofcontact” is set to “normally closed con-tact”, the relay is closed following thereceipt of a telegram with the value “0”and opened after a telegram with the va-lue “1”.

The relay contact is opened on busvoltage failure. The behaviour of therelay contact on mains voltagerecovery can be set. By default, therelay is “opened”. Further options are“closed” or “restore previous state”. Ifthe output should carry out definedswitching on/off, the actuator takes intoaccount the parameter “Switchingbehaviour”.

Logic (Switch actuator FM,6110 U-101-500)

With the parameter “Logic operation”, itis possible to set an AND or an ORfunction. In both cases, the ETS2program displays a further 1 bitcommunication object “Output - ...function” for the output. The output linksthe values of communication objectsno. 0 and no. 1 and switches the relayaccording to the result.

A corresponding parameter isavailable for preselecting a definedinput signal on bus voltage recovery.

Status (Switch actuator FM,6110 U-101-500)

If the parameter “Status response” isset to “yes”, the ETS2 programdisplays a further 1 bit communicationobject “Output - Status response”. Thiscommunication object sends atelegram each time the actuator isswitched. The value “1” means that therelay has adopted the active state inaccordance with the parameter“Behaviour of contact”.

Staircase lighting function(Switch actuator FM, 6110 U-101-500)

In the operation mode “Staircase lightingfunction”, the output is switched on im-mediately following the receipt of an

March 2003 2 - 7


“ON” telegram. Once the period that wasset in the time base and factor parame-ters has elapsed, the relay is automati-cally opened. If the output receives furt-her “ON” telegrams before the periodhas elapsed, the time restarts.

If the staircase lighting function and thelogic operation are activated, the timesetting only has an effect if the actuatoris switched via object no. 0 “Output -Switch”.

In addition to the staircase lightingfunction, it is also possible to activatean ON delay. The correspondingparameter must be activated. The ONdelay is again defined with a timebase and factor.

Timing function(Switch actuator FM, 6110 U-101-500)

With the operation mode “Timingfunction”, it is possible to activate anON and/or OFF delay. The two periodscan be of varying lengths and aredefined with a time base and factor.

The delay periods only influence theswitch object. If e.g. an OR function hasbeen selected in addition to an ONdelay, the time delay is only active if anON command is received via theswitch object. If the ON command ishowever sent directly to the logicobject, the actuator switches directly tothe state that was preselected in theparameter “Behaviour of contact”.

Switch/Dimming actuator FM(6114 U-500)

The output of the switch/dimmingactuator FM can be switched on andoff via the 1 bit communication objectno. 0 “Output - Switch”. The samecommunication object also sends atelegram if the output changes its statebecause e.g. the 4 bit object no. 1“Dimmer - Rel. dimming” or the 1 byteobject no. 2 “Dimmer - Brightnessvalue” has received a telegram.

If the output objects of several dimmingactuators/sensors use the same groupaddresses, the parameter “Mode for par-allel operation .....” must be taken intoaccount. Only one device may then beset to “master”. The other devices mustuse the setting “slave”. If this is not ob-served, the devices may send tele-grams continually to each other.

The brightness value which the flush-mounted switch/dimming actuator useswhen switching on, is defined in the pa-rameters. Either a constant value bet-ween 10 % brightness and 100 % bright-ness can be selected or the actuatorstores the value of the object “Bright-ness value” at the point when it wasswitched off via the switch object. Whenthe device is switched on again, the va-lue is restored.

Dimming(Switch/dimming actuator FM,6114 U-500)

With the 4 bit communication object“Dimmer - Rel. dimming”, theconnected luminaire can be dimmed inaccordance with EIS 2. If the actuator isswitched off, it can be dimmed on viathe 4 bit object.

The period for passing through thedimming range can be defined with thetwo parameters “Time base …” and“Factor ...”. The actuator uses theformula

Total time = Base * Factor.

With the 1 byte communication objectno. 2 “Dimmer - Brightness value”, theluminaire can be preassigned one of256 brightness values which rangefrom 0 = switched off to 255 = fullbrightness. Via the parameter“Behaviour on change in thebrightness value”, it is defined whetherthe new value should be setimmediately (“jump to value”) or at theselected dimming rate (“dim to value”).

Status (Switch/dimming actuator FM,6114 U-500)

If the parameter “Status response” isset to “yes”, the ETS2 softwaredisplays a further 1 bit object “Statusresponse”. As soon as the switch/dimming actuator is switched on, atelegram with the value “1” is sent, re-gardless of the brightness value. If theactuator is switched off again, a “0” issent.

2 - 8 March 2003

ABB i-bus® EIB

Logic (Switch/dimming actuator FM,6114 U-500)

With the parameter “Logic operation”, itis possible to set an AND or an ORfunction. In both cases, the ETS2program displays a further 1 bitcommunication object for the output.The actuator links the values ofcommunication object no. 0 “Output -Switch” and no. 3 “Output - ... function”and then switches the output. In thiscase, the parameter “Status response”also enables precise monitoring of theactual output state.

Staircase lighting function(Switch/dimming actuator FM,6114 U-500)

In the operation mode “Staircaselighting function”, the output isswitched on immediately following thereceipt of an “ON” telegram. Once theperiod that was set in the time baseand factor parameters has elapsed,the relay is automatically opened. If theoutput receives further “ON” telegramsbefore the period has elapsed, thetime restarts. In the case of the flush-mounted switch/dimming actuator, it isalso possible to integrate an extensionof the staircase lighting function.

If the staircase lighting function and thelogic operation are activated, the timesetting only has an effect if the actuatoris switched via object no. 0 “Output -Switch”.

In addition to the staircase lightingfunction, it is also possible to activate anON delay. The corresponding parametermust be activated. The ON delay isagain defined with a time base and fac-tor.


Timing function(Switch/dimming actuator FM,6114 U-500)

With the operation mode “Timingfunction”, it is possible to activate anON and/or OFF delay. The two periodscan be of varying lengths and aredefined with a time base and factor.

If e.g. an OR function has beenselected in addition to an ON delay,the time delay is only active if an ONcommand is received via the switchobject. If the ON command is howeversent directly to the logic object, theactuator switches directly to the statethat was preselected in the parameter“Behaviour of contact”.

Read-only memory(Switch/dimming actuator FM,6114 U-500)

The actuator has an additional 1 bitcommunication object “Read-onlymemory ...”. Two values can thereforebe set using the possible object values“0” and “1”. The parameters “Value forread-only memory ...” are used for thispurpose. The number of read-onlymemory devices that are actually usedis defined with the parameters“Number of objects” and “Behaviour onreceipt of an OFF telegram”.

Bus voltage failure/recovery(Switch/dimming actuator FM,6114 U-500)

On bus voltage failure, the flush-mounted switch/dimming actuatorswitches off the connected luminares.On bus voltage recovery, theluminaires normally remain switchedoff. It is however also possible to setthe minimum or maximum brightnessor the last stored brightness valuebefore the voltage failure.

March 2003 2 - 9


Communication objectswhen used as a switch sensor

Communication objectswhen used as a dimming sensor

Communication objectswhen used as a shutter sensor

Communication objectswith flexible assignment of the rockers

Communication objectswhen used as a lightscene pushbutton

Communication objectswhen used as a switch sensor value

Communication objectswhen used with flush-mounted switchsensor, AND function and statusresponse

No. Type Object name Function14 1 bit Rocker 1 Switch16 1 bit Rocker 2 Switch18 1 bit Rocker 3 Switch20 1 bit Rocker 4 Switch

No. Type Object name Function14 1 bit Rocker 1, short Switch15 4 bit Rocker 1, long Dimming16 1 bit Rocker 2, short Switch17 4 bit Rocker 2, long Dimming18 1 bit Rocker 3, short Switch19 4 bit Rocker 3, long Dimming20 1 bit Rocker 4, short Switch21 4 bit Rocker 4, long Dimming

No. Type Object name Function14 1 bit Rocker 1, long Move shutter15 1 bit Rocker 1, short Adjust shutter16 1 bit Rocker 2, long Move shutter17 1 bit Rocker 2, short Adjust shutter18 1 bit Rocker 3, long Move shutter19 1 bit Rocker 3, short Adjust shutter20 1 bit Rocker 4, long Move shutter21 1 bit Rocker 4, short Adjust shutter

No. Type Object name Function14 1 bit Rocker 1, right Switch15 1 bit Rocker 1, left Switch16 1 bit Rocker 2, right Switch17 1 bit Rocker 2, left Switch18 1 bit Rocker 3, right Switch19 1 bit Rocker 3, left Switch20 1 bit Rocker 4, right Switch21 1 bit Rocker 4, left Switch

No. Type Object name Function14 1 bit Rocker 1 Lightscene number16 1 bit Rocker 2 Lightscene number18 1 bit Rocker 3 Lightscene number20 1 bit Rocker 4 Lightscene number

No. Type Object name Function14 1 byte Rocker 1 Value16 1 byte Rocker 2 Value18 1 byte Rocker 3 Value20 1 byte Rocker 4 Value

No. Type Object name Function1 1 bit Output Switch2 1 bit Output AND function3 1 bit Output Status response

…

2 - 10 March 2003


No. Type Object name Function1 1 bit Output Switch2 1 bit Output OR function3 1 bit Output Status response

…

No. Type Object name Function1 1 bit Output Switch2 4 bit Dimmer Rel. dimming3 1 byte Dimmer Brightness value4 1 bit Output … function5 1 bit Dimmer Status response6 1 bit Dimmer Preset7 1 bit Dimmer Preset

…

No. Type Object name Function0 1 bit Status LED Switch

…


8 1 byte Lightscenes Number9 1 bit Telegr. switch Actuator group A

10 1 bit Telegr. switch Actuator group B11 1 bit Telegr. switch Actuator group C12 1 bit Telegr. switch Actuator group D13 1 bit Telegr. switch Actuator group E…


8 1 byte Lightscenes Number9 1 byte Telegr. brightness value Actuator group A

10 1 byte Telegr. brightness value Actuator group B11 1 byte Telegr. brightness value Actuator group C12 1 byte Telegr. brightness value Actuator group D13 1 byte Telegr. brightness value Actuator group E…

Communication objectswhen used with flush-mounted switchactuator, OR function and statusresponse

Communication objectswhen used with flush-mounteddimming actuator, logic operation,status response and preset objects

Communication objectswith switch object for status LED

Communication objectswith sending of lightscenes(1 bit actuator group)

Communication objectswith sending of lightscenes(1 byte actuator group)

March 2003 2 - 11


BCU type:Bus coupler / flush-mounted actuator Flush-mounted bus coupler

(6120 U-102)Flush-mounted switch actuator(6110 U-101)Flush-mounted dimming actuator(6114 U)

Parameters of rocker 1:– Operation mode of rocker Switch sensor

Dimming sensorShutter sensorFlexible assignmentLightscene sensorSwitch sensor value

Only for switch sensor:– Working mode of rocker TOGGLE

left = OFF, right = ONleft = ON, right = OFF

– Operation mode of LED indicates value of object “Rocker”orientation light

Only if the value is displayed:– Colour of the LED OFF = green, ON = red

OFF = red, ON = greenOnly if orientation light is selected:– Colour of the LED always green

always red

Only for dimming sensor:– Working mode of rocker left = darker/TOGGLE, right = brighter

TOGGLElinks = brighter/TOGGLE, right =darker/TOGGLEleft = darker/OFF, right = brighter/ONleft = brighter/ON, right = darker/OFF

– Operation mode of LED indicates value of object “Rocker,short”orientation light

Only if the value is displayed:– Colour of the LED OFF = green, ON = red

OFF = red, ON = greenOnly if orientation light is selected:– Colour of the LED always green

always red

Only for shutter sensor:– Working mode of rocker left = UP, right = DOWN

left = DOWN, right = UP– Operation mode of LED indicates value of object “Rocker, long“

orientation lightOnly if the value is displayed:– Colour of the LED UP = green, DOWN = red

UP = red, DOWN = greenOnly if orientation light is selected:– Colour of the LED always green

always red


Parameters when used as a switchsensor. The default setting for thevalues is printed in bold type.

Parameters when used as a dimmingsensor. The default setting for thevalues is printed in bold type.

Parameters when used as a shuttersensor. The default setting for thevalues is printed in bold type.

2 - 12 March 2003

ABB i-bus® EIB

Only for flexible assignment:– Reaction on right rocker TOGGLE

defined switchingOnly for defined switching:– Switch function of right rocker no reaction

rising = OFFfalling = OFFrising = OFF, falling = OFFrising = ONfalling = OFFrising = ON, falling = OFFrising = OFF, falling = ONrising = ON, falling = ON

– Reaction on left rocker TOGGLEdefined switching

Only for defined switching:– Switch function of left rocker no reaction

rising = OFFfalling = OFFrising = OFF, falling = OFFrising = ONfalling = OFFrising = ON, falling = OFFrising = OFF, falling = ONrising = ON, falling = ON

– Operation mode of rocker indicates value of object “Rocker,left”orientation light

Only if the value is displayed:– Colour of the LED UP = green, DOWN = red

UP = red, DOWN = greenOnly if orientation light is selected:– Colour of the LED always green

always red

Only for lightscene sensor:– Recall lightscene number for right 1 / 2 / 3 / … / 32

push button– Recall lightscene number for left 1 / 2 / 3 / … / 32

push button– Store lightscenes via long push not possible

button action possible– Lightscenes stored in the device no

yesOnly if “yes” is selected:– Number of lightscenes 2 / 4 / 6 / 8

Only if 2 lightscenes are selected:– Lightscene retrieval 1…32 with saving (1 byte)

“OFF”=1,“ON”=2, without saving (1 bit)– Lightscene number for 1+2 lightscene 1+2

Separate for all lightscenes:– Lightscene number for 1+2 / 3+4 / 5+6 / 7+8 / … / 31+32

lightscene …Separate for all actuator groups:– Type of actuator group … Switch or shutter actuator (1 bit)

Dimming actuator (8 bit)Separate for each lightscene:Only for 1 bit actuator groups:– Preset option for actuator group … OFF / UP

ON / DOWNOnly for 1 byte actuator groups:– Preset option for actuator group … OFF / 10 % / … / 40 % / … / 100 %


Parameters for flexible assignment.The default setting for the valuesis printed in bold type.

Parameters when used as alightscene sensor. The default settingfor the values is printed in bold type.

March 2003 2 - 13

ABB i-bus® EIB

Only for switch sensor value:– Left push button sends value 1– Right push button sends value 0– Operation mode of LED indicates value of object “Rocker”

orientation lightOnly if the value is displayed:– Colour of the LED 0=green, >0=red

0=red, >0=greenOnly if orientation light is selected:– Colour of the LED always green

always redOFF

Status LED– Status LED indicates object value

switchedOnly if switched:– Status LED if ON, status LED = OFF

if ON, status LED = ON– Behaviour of status LED on ON

bus voltage recovery OFF


Parameters for switch sensor value.The default setting for the valuesis printed in bold type.

Parameters for the status LED.The default setting for the valuesis printed in bold type.

2 - 14 March 2003


Additional parameters when used with switch actuator FM (6110 U-101):Switch actuator - General:– Behaviour of contact normally open contact

normally closed contact– Contact on mains voltage recovery opened

closedrestore previous state

Switch actuator - Operation modes:– Operation mode Normal operation

Staircase lighting functionTiming function

Only for staircase lighting function:– ON delay no

yesOnly if “yes” is selected:– Time base for ON delay approx. 130 ms / … / approx. 520 ms

/ … / approx. 1.2 h– Factor for ON delay 10 (2…127)

– Time base for staircase lighting approx. 130 ms / … / approx. 520 msfunction / … / approx. 1.2 h

– Factor for staircase lighting 10function (2…127)

Only for timing function:– ON delay no



– OFF delay noyes

Only if “yes” is selected:– Time base for OFF delay approx. 130 ms / … / approx. 520 ms

/ … / approx. 1.2 h– Factor for OFF delay 10 (2…127)

– Logic operation no logic operationAND functionOR function

Only if a logic operation is selected:– Value of logic operation on OFF “0”

mains voltage recovery ON “1”– Status response no

yes


March 2003 2 - 15


Additional parameters when used with dimming actuator FM (6114 U):Dimming actuator - General:– Behaviour on change in the jump to value

brightness value dim to value– Brightness value for ON telegram final value

parameterised valueOnly for parameterised value:– Initial brightness value OFF / 10 % / … / 90 % / 100 %

– Brightness value on mains voltage 10 % brightnessrecovery 100 % brightness

final valueOFF

– Mode for parallel operation of several masterflush-mounted dimming actuators slave

Dimming actuator - Operation modes:– Operation mode Normal operation

Staircase lighting functionTiming function

Only for staircase lighting function:– ON delay no

yesOnly for ON delay:– Time base for ON delay approx. 130 ms / … / approx. 520 ms


– Time base for staircase lighting approx. 130 ms / … / approx. 4.2 sfunction / … / approx. 1.2 h

– Factor for staircase lighting function 43(2…127)

– Enable time extension noyes

Only if “yes” is selected:– ON delay no



– OFF delay noyes

Only if “yes” is selected:– Time base for OFF delay approx. 130 ms / … / approx. 520 ms

/ … / approx. 1.2 h– Factor for OFF delay 10 (2…127)

– Logic operation no logic operationAND functionOR function

– Status response noyes


2 - 16 March 2003


Dimming rate:– Time base for passing through the approx. 0.5 ms

dimming range approx. 8.0 msapprox. 130 msapprox. 2.1 sapprox. 33 s

– Factor for passing through the 20dimming range

– Note:Time base * Factor * 255

Read-only memory:– Number of objects none

1Only if “1” is selected:– Behaviour on receipt of an ON set preselected brightness value

telegram– Brightness value for read-only OFF / 10 % / … / 30 % / … / 100 %

memory (object no. 5 = ON)– Behaviour on receipt of an OFF no reaction

telegram set preselected brightness valueOnly for preselected brightness value:– Brightness value for read-only OFF / 10 % / 20 % / … / 100 % memory (object no. 5 = OFF)


April 2007 2 - 1

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX Busch-Watchdog® Presence EIBType: 6131-74-102-500

Contents

Technical data 2 - 2

Application programs (List) 2 - 3

Circuit diagrams 2 - 3

in combination with Bus coupler FM (6120-102):Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring /3 2 - 4Switch Value Cyclic HVAC /3 2 - 10Switch Value Cyclic HVAC Monitoring /3 2 - 17Switch Dim Cyclic HVAC Monitg. Constant light /4 2 - 25

in combination with Switch actuator/sensor FM (6110 U-101-500):Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring /4 2 - 29Switch Value Cyclic HVAC /4 2 - 31Switch Value Cyclic HVAC Monitoring /4 2 - 33

In combination with Switch/dimming actuator FM (6114 U-500):Switch Dim Cycl. HVAC Monitg. Constant light /3 2 - 35

2 - 2 April 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

6,0 m

2,5 m

1,0 m

The Busch-Watchdog® Presence isclipped onto a flush-mounted buscoupler, switch actuator/sensor orswitch/dimming actuator.

The presence detector is used for swit-ching and/or constant lighting controlof lighting installations and/or HVACsystems.

The sensor can switch a heating, venti-lation or air conditioning controller onor off without dependence on the li-ghting control. Constant lighting controlcan also be implemented via additio-nal objects.

In addition to movement detection, thesensor can detect movement within acertain period with the help of its inte-grated monitoring function. It is therefo-re possible to integrate the sensor indetector systems.

The recovery time and the sensitivity ofthe built-in twilight switch can be setwith the three potentiometers on therear of the presence detector or via theparameters in ETS.

The area of detection can be adaptedto the ambient conditions with the helpof the foil supplied or via ETS.

Busch-Watchdog® Presence EIBType: 6131-xxx-102-500

normaler Erfassungsbereich

Technical data

Power supply – EIB 24 V DC, via the bus lineOperating and display elements – 3 potentiometers

– Potentiometer “Lux1” Twilight sensor 5 … 1000 lx– Potentiometer “Time Light” Recovery time 10 s … 32 min– Potentiometer ”Time HVAC” Recovery time 1 min … 60 min

Connections – Bus coupler FM 10-pole plug connector– Switch actuator/sensor FM– Switch/dimming actuator FM

Type of protection – IP 20, EN 60 529mounted on the bus coupler

Ambient temperature range – Operation - 5 °C … 45 °C– Storage -25 °C … 55 °C– Transport -25 °C … 70 °C

Installation – latched onto flush-mounted insertDimensions – 110 x 51 mm (Ø x H)Weight – 0.1 kgCertification – EIB-certifiedCE mark – in accordance with the EMC guideline and

low voltage guideline

April 2007 2 - 3

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

+EIB

+EIB

L

N

- -

Circuit diagrams

1 8

72

4

3

1

8

7

2 6

1 5

1 Bus cable 5 Switch/dimming actuator FM(6114 U-500)

2 Bus terminal 6 Ballast with 0 (1) - 10V control input3 Bus coupler FM 7 Connecting terminals4 Switch actuator FM (6110 U-101-500) 8 230 V mains voltage



For Bus coupler FM:Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring /3 11 29 29Switch Value Cyclic HVAC /3 11 29 29Switch Value Cyclic HVAC Monitoring /3 11 29 29Switch Dim Cyclic HVAC Monitg. Constant light /4 12 29 28

For Switch actuator/sensor FM:Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring /4 11 29 29Switch Value Cyclic HVAC /4 11 29 29Switch Value Cyclic HVAC Monitoring /4 11 29 29

For Switch/dimming actuator FM:Switch Dim Cycl. HVAC Monitg. Constant light /3 12 20 12

Note The Busch-Watchdog® Presence issolely designed for indoor areas e.g. inschools, offices or private buildings.

The full functionality of the device isdependent on the mounting height.The area of detection can also beadapted via a foil which is includedwith supply.

Application examples and detailedinformation about e.g. “intelligent”HVAC system control and setting thepotentiometers can be found in theuser manual “Busch-Watchdog®

Presence”.

2 - 4 April 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

Detection areas

Sensor 1

Sensor 4

Sensor 3

Sensor 2

��

�

Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring /3

Selection in ETS

– Busch-Jaeger ElektroPhys. Sensors

Presence detector

With the application, the presence de-tector can sense movement in its areaof detection and send out switching orvalue telegrams.

The application makes two indepen-dent channels available which can beused to switch on the lighting. It alsohas a monitoring function.

During the parameterisation, it shouldbe noted that some parameters (if re-quired) are only visible when “HighAccess” is selected and can only thenbe modified.

Master / Slave

It is possible to switch severalpresence detectors together. This isnecessary e.g. in rooms in which onepresence detector alone is no longersufficient for the detection. If two ormore presence detectors are installedin a room, one presence detector mustoperate as “Standard / Master” and allthe others must be set to the “Slave”function. In the “Slave” function, thepresence detector only sends ON tele-grams cyclically when it detects move-ment. The recovery time only runs forthe master presence detector. The re-covery time is restarted for the masterafter each ON telegram.

To ensure that the presence detectionof the master and slave is equal, thesame group address must be used forboth devices. If different group addres-ses are used, the recovery time in themaster is restarted each time an ONtelegram is received cyclically where-by the light is not switched on.

The cyclical transmission periodsshould be as long as possible in orderto take the bus load into account.

Detection areas

The presence detector has four areasof detection. Each area of detection(sensor area) covers 90° of the sur-rounding area of the presence detec-tor. The sensor areas are counted in aclockwise direction (see diagram “De-tection areas”).

It is possible to remove individual sen-sor areas from the detection via thegeneral parameter “Detection area”. Allthe sensor areas are active by defaulti.e. the presence detector senses mo-vements throughout the surroundingarea (360°). If the parameter “Detectionarea” is set e.g. to “Sensor 2&3”, thepresence detector only detects move-ment in half of its surroundings (180°).It is therefore not necessary to maskindividual segments of the lens.

Switch

The presence detector sends swit-ching telegrams to its communicationobjects “Movement channel … – Tele-gr. switch” as soon as it senses move-ment in its area of detection. The valueof the switching telegram can be setwith the parameter “Sending at detec-tion”. It is possible to send an ON tele-gram, an OFF telegram or no telegramonce movement has been detected.The ON or OFF telegrams can also besent cyclically.

If the presence detector is no longeraware of any movement once the reco-very time has elapsed, it is possible for


Detection areas of the presencedetector

April 2007 2 - 5

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

an ON telegram, an OFF telegram orno telegrams to be sent. The ON orOFF telegrams can also be sent cycli-cally. The behaviour is defined with theparameter “Telegram after recoverytime”.

Each channel of the presence detectorcan be enabled/disabled separately.The communication objects “Move-ment channel …/ Activation” are usedfor this purpose. The objects are madevisible with the parameter “Activationobject movement”.

If the presence detector receives a te-legram at this object, the presence de-tector is activated or deactivated. Withthe parameters “If movement is …”, it ispossible to set whether an ON tele-gram, an OFF telegram or no tele-grams are sent via the communicationobject “Movement channel … – Telegr.switch”.

Example:In a functional building, all thepresence detectors should be swit-ched off in the mornings. To do so, a “1”is sent to a central point with a timeswitch and received at the communica-tion objects “Movement channel … –Activation”. In this example, the para-meter “Enabling movement at” is set to“ON telegram”.

Value

Value telegrams can also be sent ondetection of movement. To do so, theparameter “Type of movement object”must be changed from “Switching(EIS1)” to “Value (EIS6)”. Dimming ac-tuators can thus be dimmed to a valuewhich is less than the maximum valuee.g. to be dimmed to the backgroundlighting.

The value that is sent is defined withthe parameter setting “Sending at thebeginning/end of detection”. It is alsopossible to set that no telegrams aresent.

Cyclic

All switching telegrams can also besent cyclically. It should be ensuredthat the setting “ON telegram cyclically”or “OFF telegram cyclically” is selectedin the relevant parameter.

The total cycle time can be set with theparameters “Time base for cyclical


sending” and “Time factor for …”. Theperiod in which a telegram is repeatedcyclically is composed of a base and afactor:

Cycle time = Base * Factor

Channel settings

The brightness level at which thepresence detector is triggered is set bydefault via the ETS parameter “Thres-hold illumination”. Values between 5lux and 1000 lux can be entered. Itshould be noted that the setting for“Threshold illumination” refers to theinstallation site of the presence detec-tor and not to the level of the luxmeter.Alternatively, the Lux1 potentiometercan define the threshold. To do so, thesetting “Threshold illumination adjusta-ble with” must be changed to “Lux1potentiometer”.

The recovery time can be set with thehelp of the potentiometer on the rear ofthe presence detector or via the ETSprogram. The preset option is the ETSvariant. The recovery time can be set inETS with the two parameters “Timebase of recovery time” and “Time factorof recovery time”. The product of thebase and factor forms the recoverytime:


Note:If both potentiometers are set to “POTI”,the “Test” setting is only used forchecking the function and area of de-tection of the device without depen-dence on the brightness level. In the“Test” setting, the recovery time set inETS is not taken into account and isonly approx. 10 s (see also the opera-ting instructions for the presence de-tector).

If the setting of the recovery time is de-fined in ETS with “Illumination poten-tiometer”, the recovery time is definedvia the illumination potentiometer inthe same way as conventional detec-tors. It is therefore also possible to mo-dify the recovery time without ETS.

Brightness-dependent switching

A further communication object can beenabled separately for each channelwith the parameter “Activation objectbrightness-dependent switching”. If thecommunication object “Brightness-de-pendent switching channel …” recei-ves a “1”, the presence detector swit-

2 - 6 April 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX Busch-Watchdog® Presence EIBType: 6131-xxx-102-500

ches dependent on the level of bright-ness. The switch threshold settingswhich have been carried out with thepotentiometer on the rear of the deviceor with ETS have therefore no signifi-cance for the period of activation. If a“0” is received at the object, thepresence detector first sends ON tele-grams again once it has fallen belowthe illumination threshold.

Light source

If the proportion of external lightincreases, the presence detectorsends an OFF telegram as soon as theexternal light reaches the required illu-minance. The type of light source mustbe indicated.

Example:Illuminance 500 lx

The illumination threshold of 500 lx isdefined via the potentiometer on thepresence detector or via ETS.

If movement is now detected in a darkroom in the mornings and the bright-ness value lies below 500 lx, thepresence detector sends an ON tele-gram in the event of movement.a) Switched light source:When the luminaires are switched onthey generate an illuminance of 500 lx.The external light is added to this. Thepresence detector switches off if itmeasures the illuminance at 1000 lx.

b) Controlled light source (constantlight):If conventional constant lighting controlis integrated in the luminaires, it regu-lates the proportion of artificial light sothat the measured illuminance remainsconstant at 500 lx. If the presence de-tector now measures more than 550 lx,the luminaires are already dimmeddown to the minimum brighness valueand are switched off.

Monitoring








April 2007 2 - 7

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX



Communication objectswith monitoring objects

Communication objectswith value monitoring objects

Communication objectswith brightness-dependent switching

No. Type Object name Function0 1 bit Movement channel 1 Telegr. switch1 1 bit Movement channel 1 Activation3 1 bit Movement channel 2 Telegr. switch4 1 bit Movement channel 2 Activation

No. Type Object name Function0 1 byte Movement channel 1 Telegr. switch1 1 bit Movement channel 1 Activation3 1 byte Movement channel 2 Telegr. switch4 1 bit Movement channel 2 Activation






2 1 bit Brightness-dependent Activationswitching channel 1

…5 1 bit Brightness-dependent Activation

switching channel 2…


Bus voltage recovery

The states of the communication ob-jects “Movement channel … – Telegr.switch” adopt defined states on busvoltage recovery”. The states for chan-nel 1 and 2 can be defined separately.This prevents unwanted switchingoperations on bus voltage recovery.

Defined states can also be selected forthe objects “Brightness-dependentswitching channel …”. The parametersare only visible if the objects have pre-viously been enabled.

2 - 8 April 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

ParametersThe default setting for the valuesis printed in bold type

Note:When using the device in ETS2, someparameters are only visible and selec-table in the setting “High Access”.


Presence detector parameters with “Low Access”:General:– Operation mode illumination channel 1 Standard / Master

Slave– Operation mode illumination channel 2 Standard / Master

Slave– Detection area Sensor 1&2

Sensor 2&3Sensor 3&4Sensor 1&4Sensor 1-4

– Behaviour on bus voltage recovery(comm. objects)

– Brightness-dependent switching enabled(Illumination channel 1) disabled


– Movement disabled(Illumination channel 1) enabled

– Movement disabled(Illumination channel 2) enabledOnly if activation object for monitoringfunction is available:– Monitoring function disabled

enabled

Parameters for illumination channel 1 or channel 2:– Activation object brightness-dependent not available

switching available– Activation object movement not available

availableOnly if movement object isavailable:– Enabling movement at ON telegram

OFF telegram– If “Movement” is disabled do not send a telegram

send telegram once at movementsend telegram once after detection

– If “Movement” is enabled do not send a telegramsend telegram once at movementsend telegram once after detection

– Type of movement object Switching (EIS1)Value (EIS6)

Only for “Switching (EIS1)”:– Sending at detection ON telegram


Only in “Standard / Master” operation mode:– Telegram after recovery time ON telegram


– Time base for cyclical sending 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min– Time factor for cyclical sending 10Only for “Value (EIS6)”:– Sending at detection 100% / 90 % / … / 10 % / OFF /

no telegram– Telegram after recovery time 100% / 90 % / … / 10 % / OFF /

no telegram

April 2007 2 - 9




Parameters for adjustments channel 1 or channel 2:– Note:

The offset of the brightness valueshould take place on a luxmeter.(see technical handbook for more information)

– Threshold illumination adjustable ETSwith Lux1 potentiometerOnly if set with ETS:– Threshold illumination 100

(5 lux …1000 lux)– Recovery time adjustable with ETS

Illumination potentiometerOnly if set with ETS:– Potentiometer should not be at TEST– Time base of recovery time 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s /

34 s / 9 min– Time factor of recovery time 100

– Light source switchedcontrolled (constant brightness)

Monitoring function– Activation object monitoring not available

availableOnly if available:– Enable monitoring function at ON telegram

OFF telegram– Type of monitoring object Switching (EIS1)

Value (EIS6)Only for “Switching (EIS1)”:– Sending at the beginning of ON telegram detection OFF telegram

ON telegram cyclicallyOFF telegram cyclicallyno telegram


– Time base for cyclical sending 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min– Time factor for cyclical sending 100Only for “Value (EIS6)”:– Sending at the beginning of 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / detection no telegram– Sending at the end of detection 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF /

no telegram– Threshold 4

(1:sensitive / 255:insensitive)– Time base until watchdog is in 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /

monitoring function 9 min– Time factor until watchdog is in 100

monitoring function

2 - 10 April 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

Detection areas

Sensor 1

Sensor 4

Sensor 3

Sensor 2

��

�

Switch Value Cyclic HVAC /3

Selection in ETS


Presence detector


The application makes two indepen-dent channels available which can beused to switch on the lighting and onechannel for influencing the “HVAC con-trol”.


Master / Slave




Detection areas



Switch





April 2007 2 - 11

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

an ON telegram, an OFF telegram orno telegrams to be sent. The ON orOFF telegrams can also be sent cycli-cally. The behaviour is defined with theparameter “Telegram after recoverytime”.

Each channel of the presence detectorcan be enabled/disabled separately.The communication objects “Move-ment channel …/ Activation” are usedfor this purpose. The objects are madevisible with the parameter “Activationobject movement”.



Value



Cyclic


The total cycle time can be set with theparameters “Time base for cyclical


sending” and “Time factor for …”. Theperiod in which a telegram is repeatedcyclically is composed of a base and afactor:


Channel settings







A further communication object can beenabled separately for each channelwith the parameter “Activation objectbrightness-dependent switching”. If thecommunication object “Brightness-de-pendent switching channel …” recei-ves a “1”, the presence detector swit-

2 - 12 April 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

ches dependent on the level of bright-ness. The switch threshold settingswhich have been carried out with thepotentiometer on the rear of the deviceor with ETS have therefore no signifi-cance for the period of activation. If a“0” is received at the object, thepresence detector first sends ON tele-grams again once it has fallen belowthe illumination threshold.

Light source




If movement is now detected in a darkroom in the mornings and the bright-ness value lies below 500 lx, thepresence detector sends an ON tele-gram in the event of movement.

a) Switched light source:When the luminaires are switched onthey generate an illuminance of 500 lx.The external light is added to this. Thepresence detector switches off if itmeasures the illuminance at 1000 lx.



HVAC

The presence detector can activate aheating or ventilation controller with itsobject “Movement HVAC”. The objectsends telegrams independently of thebrightness value.

The ON delay is the period which theHVAC channel needs until it detects amovement. By default, this period is setautomatically by the presence detector.It can however also be fixed. To do so,the “Switch ON delay” must be set viaETS. The period is composed of a baseand a factor in a similar way to the re-covery time.

If the switching behaviour is set withthe “HVAC potentiometer”, the follo-wing must be noted:– If an OFF delay between 1 and 10

min is defined with the potentiome-ter, the ON delay is set at 30 s. Thissetting can e.g. switch on a fan in thecloakroom.

– If the OFF delay is set at longer than10 min, the operating time is basedon the frequency that movement isdetected. In a standard office, theheating system is only switched on ifthe employee is present for a lengthyperiod. The heating in a conferenceroom which is rarely used is not acti-vated when someone only enters theroom briefly and then leaves againafter a short period.

The “Movement HVAC” object can trig-ger a telegram on detection of move-ment and after an adjustable recoverytime. With the parameter “Type of mo-vement object”, it is set whether 1 bitswitching telegrams or 1 byte valuetelegrams are triggered. The switchingtelegrams can also be sent cyclically inthe same way as the movement chan-nels.

April 2007 2 - 13

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX




No. Type Object name Function0 1 bit Movement channel 1 Telegr. switch1 1 bit Movement channel 1 Activation3 1 bit Movement channel 2 Telegr. switch4 1 bit Movement channel 2 Activation6 1 bit Movement HvAC Telegr. switch7 1 bit Movement HVAC Activation

No. Type Object name Function0 1 byte Movement channel 1 Telegr. value1 1 bit Movement channel 1 Activation3 1 byte Movement channel 2 Telegr. value4 1 bit Movement channel 2 Activation6 1 byte Movement HVAC Telegr. value7 1 bit Movement HVAC Activation



…5 1 bit Brightness-dependent Activation

switching channel 2…



The states of the communication ob-jects “Movement channel … – Telegr.switch” adopt defined states on busvoltage recovery”. The states for chan-nel 1 and 2 can be defined separately.This prevents unwanted switchingoperations on bus voltage recovery.

Defined states can also be selected forthe objects “Brightness-dependentswitching channel …”. The parametersare only visible if the objects have pre-viously been enabled.

2 - 14 April 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

General:– Operation mode illumination channel 1 Standard / Master

Slave– Operation mode illumination channel 2 Standard / Master







– Movement disabled(HVAC) enabled


Parameters for illumination channel 1 or channel 2:– Activation object brightness-dependent not available


availableOnly if activation object for movementis available:– Enable movement at ON telegram







Only in “Standard / Master” operation mode:– Telegram after recovery time ON telegram




no telegram




April 2007 2 - 15




Parameters for adjustments channel 1 or channel 2:– Note:



(5 Lux …1000 lux)– Recovery time adjustable with ETS



– Light source switchedcontrolled (constant light)

HVAC:– Activation object movement not available

availableOnly if activation object is available:– Enabling movement at ON telegram










no telegram

2 - 16 April 2007


Adjustments HVAC:– Recovery time adjustable with ETS

HVAC potentiometerOnly if set with ETS:– Potentiometer should not be at TEST– Time base of recovery time 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s /


– Switch ON is adjustable automaticallyby ETS

Only if set with ETS:– Time base of switch ON delay 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s /

34 s / 9 min– Time factor of switch ON delay 100



April 2007 2 - 17

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

Detection areas

Sensor 1

Sensor 4

Sensor 3

Sensor 2

��

�

Switch Value Cyclic HVACMonitoring /3

Selection in ETS


Presence detector


The application makes two indepen-dent channels available. One channelcan switch on the lighting while theother can switch on an HVAC system.The presence detector also has a mo-nitoring function.


Master / Slave




Detection areas



Switch





2 - 18 April 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

an ON telegram, an OFF telegram orno telegrams to be sent. The ON orOFF telegrams can also be sent cycli-cally. The behaviour is defined with theparameter “Telegram after recoverytime”.Each channel of the presence detectorcan be enabled/disabled separately.The communication objects “Move-ment channel …/ Activation” are usedfor this purpose. The objects are madevisible with the parameter “Activationobject movement”.



Value



Cyclic


The total cycle time can be set with theparameters “Time base for cyclicalsending” and “Time factor for …”. The


period in which a telegram is repeatedcyclically is composed of a base and afactor:


Channel settings







A further communication object can beenabled separately for each channelwith the parameter “Activation objectbrightness-dependent switching”. If thecommunication object “Brightness-de-pendent switching channel …” recei-ves a “1”, the presence detector swit-ches dependent on the level of bright-

April 2007 2 - 19

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

ness. The switch threshold settingswhich have been carried out with thepotentiometer on the rear of the deviceor with ETS have therefore no signifi-cance for the period of activation. If a“0” is received at the object, thepresence detector first sends ON tele-grams again once it has fallen belowthe illumination threshold.

Light source




If movement is now detected in a darkroom in the mornings and the bright-ness value lies below 500 lx, thepresence detector sends an ON tele-gram in the event of movement.

a) Switched light source:When the luminaires are switched onthey generate an illuminance of 500 lx.The external light is added to this. Thepresence detector switches off if itmeasures the illuminance at 1000 lx.


HVAC

The presence detector can activate aheating or ventilation controller with itsobject “Movement HVAC”. The objectsends telegrams independently of thebrightness value.The ON delay is the period which theHVAC channel needs until it detects amovement. By default, this period is setautomatically by the presence detector.It can however also be fixed. To do so,the “Switch ON delay” must be set via


ETS. The period is composed of a baseand a factor in a similar way to the re-covery time.

If the switching behaviour is set withthe “HVAC potentiometer”, the follo-wing must be noted:– If an OFF delay between 1 and 10

min is defined with the potentiome-ter, the ON delay is set at 30 s. Thissetting can e.g. switch on a fan in thecloakroom.

– If the OFF delay is set at longer than10 min, the operating time is basedon the frequency that movement isdetected. In a standard office, theheating system is only switched on ifthe employee is present for a lengthyperiod. The heating in a conferenceroom which is rarely used is not acti-vated when someone only enters theroom briefly and then leaves againafter a short period.

The “Movement HVAC” object can trig-ger a telegram on detection of move-ment and after an adjustable recoverytime. With the parameter “Type of mo-vement object”, it is set whether 1 bitswitching telegrams or 1 byte valuetelegrams are triggered. The switchingtelegrams can also be sent cyclically inthe same way as the movement chan-nels.

Monitoring

The Monitoring function does not serveto create a VdS certified alarm system.It offers the possibility to use the EIB/KNX-system to control rooms. It is notan alternative for an alarm system.



On a further “Monitoring function” tab, itis possible to set the type of the moni-

2 - 20 April 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

toring object (1 bit or 1 byte) and thetype of telegram at the start of detec-tion dependent on the intensity andcyclical sending behaviour.






The states of the communication ob-jects “Movement channel … – Telegr.switch” adopt defined states on busvoltage recovery”. The states for chan-nel 1 and 2 can be defined separately.This prevents unwanted switchingoperations on bus voltage recovery.Defined states can also be selected forthe objects “Brightness-dependentswitching channel …“. The parametersare only visible if the objects have pre-viously been enabled.

April 2007 2 - 21

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX



Communication objectswith monitoring objects

Communication objectswith value monitoring objects


No. Type Object name Function0 1 bit Movement channel 1 Telegr. switch1 1 bit Movement channel 1 Activation3 1 bit Movement HVAC Telegr. switch4 1 bit Movement HVAC Activation6 1 bit Signal Telegr. switch

No. Type Object name Function0 1 byte Movement channel 1 Telegr. switch1 1 bit Movement channel 1 Activation3 1 byte Movement HVAC Telegr. switch4 1 bit Movement HVAC Activation







…


2 - 22 April 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX




General:– Operation mode illumination 1 Standard / Master






– Movement disabled(HVAC channel 2) enabled

– Monitoring function disabledenabled

Parameters for illumination channel 1:– Activation object brightness-dependent not available


availableOnly if activation object for movementis available:– Enable movement at ON telegram







Only in “Standard / Master” mode:– Telegram after recovery time ON telegram




no telegram

April 2007 2 - 23




Parameters for adjustments channel 1:– Note:



(5 lux …1000 lux)– Recovery time adjustable with ETS



– Light source switchedcontrolled (constant light)

HVAC:– Activation object movement not available

availableOnly if activation object is available:– Enable movement at ON telegram










no telegram

2 - 24 April 2007


Adjustments HVAC:– Recovery time adjustable with ETS

HVAC potentiometerOnly if set with ETS:– Potentiometer should not be at TEST– Time base of recovery time 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s /


– Switch ON delay is adjustable automaticallyby ETS

Only if set with ETS:– Time base of switch ON delay 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s /

34 s / 9 min– Time factor of switch ON delay 100

Monitoring function– Activation object monitoring not available

availableOnly if available:– Enable monitoring function at ON telegram

OFF telegram– Type of monitoring object Switching (EIS1)

Value (EIS6)Only for “Switching (EIS1)”:– Sending at the beginning of ON telegram detection OFF telegram


– Sending at the end of ON telegram detection OFF telegram


– Time base for cyclical sending 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min– Time factor for cyclical sending 100Only for “Value (EIS6)”:– Sending at the beginning of 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / detection no telegram– Sending at the end of 100 % / 90 % / … / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / detection no telegram

– Threshold 4(1:sensitive / 255:insensitive)

– Time base until watchdog is in 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /monitoring function 9 min

– Time factor until watchdog is in 100monitoring function



April 2007 2 - 25


��

�

Switch Dim Cyclic HVAC Monitg.Constant light /4

Selection in ETS


Presence detector

The application program is intendedfor the presence detector in connectionwith a flush-mounted bus coupler.

Note: The descriptions for– Switch,– Value,– Cyclic,– Channel settings,– Brightness-dependent switching,– Light source,– HVAC– and Monitoringhave been outlined in the applicationdescription “Switch Value Cyclic HVACMonitoring”.

The following section describes thedimming function and constant lightingcontrol.

Dim

The application has a 1 bit communi-cation object “Output - Switching” anda 4 bit communication object. Both ob-jects are used to detect whether thebrightness of the luminaires has beenmodified manually by a switching ordimming telegram. If the presence de-tector detects a switching or dimmingtelegram via these objects, it tempora-rily switches the constant lighting con-trol off.

The initial brightness value is definedin the parameters. If required, a con-stant value between 10 % brightnessand 100 % brightness can be selected.

Using the 1 byte communication object“Dimmer - Brightness value”, the con-nected luminaire can be assigned oneof 256 brightness values in a rangebetween 0 = switched off to 255 = fullbrightness.

Constant light

The constant lighting control can referto one or several dimming actuators.The current brightness value is sentvia the communication object “Dimmer- Brightness value”. It must be ensuredthat the dimming actuators which areused in this case have entered a com-mon group address at their brightnessobject.

The constant lighting control can beactivated or deactivated at any time viathe EIB. The object “Constant bright-ness controller - Activation” is used forthis purpose. If a telegram with the va-lue “1” is received at this object, theconstant lighting control is switched on.It is switched off if a telegram with thevalue “0” is sent to the object.

If the constant lighting control shouldfor example be switched on directly ondetection of movement, the objects“Movement - Telegr. switch” and “Con-stant brightness controller - Activation”must be linked together via a commongroup address.

If an OFF telegram is sent to the 1 bitobject “Output - Switching”, the con-stant lighting control is deactivated. Nofurther telegrams are sent via the ob-ject “Brightness value”.

If an ON telegram is sent to the 1 bitobject “Output - Switching”, the con-stant lighting control is activated. Theparameterised initial brightness valueis sent first. The constant lighting con-trol then starts and regulates via the“Brightness value” object the actuatorsthat are linked with a group address.

The time which the controller needs topass through the complete dimmingrange is defined with the parameter“Speed of control loop”. It is morepleasant for the human eye if thebrightness level remains as constantas possible. Rapid changes in thebrightness level are disruptive.

In addition to the speed of the controlloop, there is the “Dimming step size ofthe control”. A slow control setting ispreset which means that the constantlighting control always increases or re-duces the brightness value by plus/mi-nus two.

Example:The actual brightness value is 104 butthe room brightness is too dark. Thepresence detector sends a telegramwith the value “106” to its communicati-on object “Dimmer - Brightness value”.If it determines via its light sensor thatthe room lighting is sufficient, no furt-her telegrams are sent. If it is still toodark, a telegram with the value “108” issent. This process is repeated until therequired brightness level is reached. Abrightness value that is too high is dim-

2 - 26 April 2007


med down using the same process butin the opposite direction.

The “Dimming step size of the control”can also be be set to “-2/+16 (fast con-trol at dimming up)”. In this setting, thepresence detector always increasesthe brightness value by +16 if it esta-blishes that there is insufficient light inthe room. If the required brightness va-lue is dimmed too far, the presence de-tector continues to send telegrams withsmaller brightness values and thusdims down again.

The “fast control“ is particularly a goodidea if the room is protected againststrong sunlight by blinds. In the setting“slow control”, the constant lightingcontrol could supply the room with in-sufficient brightness due to the blindbeing lowered. It would become toodark temporarily and the period untilthe constant lighting control could ad-just the brightness level accordinglywould be too long.

Normally, the constant lighting controlswitches off the connected dimmingactuators when the brightness valuereaches the value “0”. This means thatthe brightness level in the room is suf-ficient and the connected luminairesdo not need to remain switched on atthe minimum brightness.

For some electronic ballasts, which al-ways switch on at maximum brightnessand are only then dimmed down, it isadvisable to change the setting. Theparameter “Constant brightness con-troller minimum” is used for this purpo-se. In the setting “1”, the presence de-tector is no longer switched off butremains at its minimum brightness va-lue while it still detects movement. If itnow becomes dark again, the electro-nic ballasts would dim up as normalwithout briefly indicating maximumbrightness.

It is possible to select via the ETS pro-gram the value at which the constant li-ghting control should be set. The set-point for the constant lighting control isentered directly. This can be a bright-ness value between 5 and 1000 lux. Itis however better to allow the user toenter the required brightness value di-rectly. The communication object “Con-stant brightness controller - Save act.brightness value” is available for thispurpose. As soon as a telegram withthe value “1” is received at this object,

the presence detector adopts the cur-rent brightness value as the new set-point value for the constant lightingcontrol. The controller must then be re-started. This can either be carried outvia the object “Output - Switching” orwith an ON telegram or following de-tection of movement once the previousrecovery time has elapsed.

A new setpoint can be assigned at anytime via the 1 byte communication ob-ject “Constant brightness controller -Brightness setpoint/act. value” (see ex-ample).

If the user leaves the room, thepresence detector starts the recoverytime which is set on the tab “Adjust-ments channel 1”. If the user hashowever previously adapted thebrightness value to his requirementsvia the dimming objects, the presencedetector starts the recovery time of theinactive constant lighting control oncethe normal recovery time has elapsed.This means that if someone shouldenter the room during this period, thepresence detector/bus coupler combi-nation will not start the constant li-ghting control again but the object“Dimmer - Brightness value” will sendits last active brightness value.

The presence detector can switch onthe constant lighting control mode di-rectly after bus voltage recovery or bedisabled. A corresponding setting isavailable on the “General” tab.

The current “Brightness setpoint/actualvalue” is not stored in the event of abus voltage failure. If a specific bright-ness value should be set after busvoltage recovery, it should be sentagain to the object “Constant bright-ness controller - Brightness setpoint/act. value”.

Example:Constant lighting control should beused on a tennis court to save energy.A brightness level of 200 lux should beused during leisure mode while a va-lue of 500 lux should be used duringcompetition mode.

The presence detector on a flush-mounted bus coupler, a built-in switch/dimming actuator and a 1-fold switchsensor (application “Value”) are usedfor toggling between the two constantlighting modes.

April 2007 2 - 27

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

Care should be taken that the samegroup addresses are entered in thecommunication objects for dimming inboth the presence detector and theswitch/dimming actuator.

The presence detector must be instal-led in an appropriate position and putinto operation. After commissioning,the illuminance must be determinedwith a measuring device. The currentbrightness value of the actuator can bemodified via the dimming objects untilan illuminance of 200 lx is achieved.This adjustment should take place intest mode. The corresponding parame-ter must be set to “test mode” for thisperiod.

After each switching or dimming pro-cess, the presence detector sends thecurrent actual brightness value via theobject “Constant brightness controller -Brightness setpoint/act. value”. Thetransmit flag must be set by default.


The actual value that is sent can be re-corded with the help of the telegramrecording function in ETS. The recor-ded value can now be entered in theparameters of the 1-fold switch sensorwith the application “Value”.

The dimming actuator is then dimmedup to 500 lx. The presence detectorthen sends the current setpoint/actualvalue again automatically. The valuethat is now recorded can likewise beentered in the parameters of the 1-foldswitch sensor, in the same way as thevalue for 200 lx.

When selecting the application of theswitch sensor, it should be noted thatthe communication objects of the rok-kers can send 1 byte values.

Then put the switch sensor into opera-tion and the constant lighting controlwith toggling between two operatingmodes is implemented.

2 - 28 April 2007





– Behaviour on bus voltage recovery:(comm. objects)

– Movement disabled(Illumination channell 1) enabled

– Movement disabled(HVAC channel 2) enabledOnly if activation object for monitoringfunction is available:– Monitoring function disabled

enabledOnly if activation object for constantbrightness controller is available– Constant brightness controller disabled

enabled

Constant brightness controller:– Activation object constant brightness not available

control availableOnly if activation object is available:– Enabling constant brightness ON telegram

control at OFF telegram– Switch ON brightness 10 % / 20 % / … / 50% / … / 100%– Constant brightness controller 0 (OFF)

minimum is 1– Dimming step size of the control -2 / +2 (slow control)

-2 / +16 (fast control at dimmingup)

– Speed of control loop test mode (2.5 min)fast (4 min)normal (10 min)slow (19 min)

– Setpoint brightness control 20(5 lux … 1000 lux)

– Time base of recovery time 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /9 min

– Time factor of recovery time 100

Additional parameters for constant li-ghting control. The default setting forthe values is printed in bold type


Additional communication objectsfor constant lighting control


6 1 bit Output Switching7 4 bit Dimmer Rel. dimming8 1 byte Dimmer Brightness value9 1 bit Const. brightn. controller Activation

10 1 bit Const. brightn. controller Save act. brightness value11 1 byte Const. brightn. controller Brightness setpoint/act. value

April 2007 2 - 29

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

��

�

Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring /4

Selection in ETS


Presence detector

The application program is intendedfor the presence detector in connectionwith the flush-mounted switch actuator/sensor.

Note: The descriptions for– Switch,– Value,– Cyclic,– Channel settings,– Brightness-dependent switching,– Light source,– and Monitoringhave been outlined in the applicationdescription “Switch Value Cyclic Moni-toring”.

The following section describes thefunction of the relay output.

Relay

The relay contact can be parameteri-sed for different applications as a nor-mally open or a normally closed con-tact.

The relay output has its own communi-cation object “Output - Switching”. Therelay output can thus be switched viathe EIB without dependence on thepresence detector. If the relay shouldbe triggered by the presence detector,the communication objects “Movementchannel …/ Telegr. switch” and “Output- Switching” must be linked with a com-mon group address.

Busch-Watchdog® Presence EIBType: 6110 U-101-500 + 6131-xxx-102-500

During normal operation, the relay out-put can also be parameterised with ONand OFF times. This periods are com-posed of a base and a factor.

In the staircase lighting function, anoperating time is available as in nor-mal operation. The period of the stair-case lighting function is parameterisedvia a base and a factor.

The actuator can send its status on theEIB. To do so, the parameter “Status re-sponse” must be set to “yes”. In thiscase, the communication object “Out-put - Status” is available. If the value“1” is sent, it means that the relay haspicked up. The sending of the status isnot dependent on the setting “normallyopen contact” or “normally closed con-tact”.

The behaviour of the relay output onbus voltage recovery can be set via theparameter “Contact at bus voltage re-covery” and is set by default to “OFF”. Ifthe relay should close on bus voltagerecovery, the parameter “Contact atbus voltage recovery” must be chan-ged to “ON”.

2 - 30 April 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

General:– Contact at bus voltage recovery ON

(FM switch actuator) OFF

Output switch act. FM:– Operation mode normal operation

staircase lighting function– Switch ON delay yes

noOnly if “yes” is selected:– Time base of switch ON delay 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /

9 min– Time factor of switch ON delay 64

(1 … 255)Only for normal operation:– Switch OFF delay yes

noOnly if “yes” is selected:– Time base for switch OFF delay 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /

9 min– Time factor for switch OFF delay 10 (1 … 255)

Only for staircase lighting function:– Time base for staircase lighting 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /

function 9 min– Factor for staircase lighting 10

function (1 … 255)– Status response yes

no– Relay is normally closed contact

normally open contact

Additional parameters for output offlush-mounted switch actuator. The de-fault setting for the values is printed inbold type



Additional communication objectsfor relay output.


8 1 bit Output Switching10 1 bit Output Status

April 2007 2 - 31

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

��

�

Switch Value Cyclic HVAC /4

Selection in ETS


Presence detector


Note: The descriptions for– Switch,– Value,– Cyclic,– Channel settings,– Brightness-dependent switching,– Light source,– and HVAChave been outlined in the applicationdescription “Switch Value CyclicHVAC”.


Relay








2 - 32 April 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX Busch-Watchdog® Presence EIBType: 6110 U-101-500 + 6131-xxx-102-500




















April 2007 2 - 33

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX

��

�

Switch Value Cyclic HVACMonitoring/4

Selection in ETS


Presence detector


Note: The descriptions for– Switch,– Value,– Cyclic,– Channel settings,– Brightness-dependent switching,– Light source– HVAC– and Monitoringhave been outlined in the applicationdescription “Switch Value Cyclic HVACMonitoring”.


Relay








2 - 34 April 2007

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX Busch-Watchdog® Presence EIBType: 6110 U-101-500 + 6131-xxx-102-500




















April 2007 2 - 35

ABB i-bus® EIB/KNX Busch-Watchdog® Presence EIBType: 6114 U-500 + 6131-xxx-102-500

��

�

Switch Dim Cycl. HVAC Monitg.Constant light /3

Selection in ETS


Presence detector

The application program is intendedfor the presence detector in connectionwith the flush-mounted switch/dimmingactuator.

Note: The descriptions for– Switch,– Value,– Cyclic,– Channel settings,– Brightness-dependent switching,– Light source,– HVAC– and Monitoringhave been outlined in the applicationdescription “Switch Value Cyclic HVACMonitoring”.

The following section describes thefunction of the switch/dimming actuatorand constant lighting control.

Switch/dimming actuator

The output can be switched on and offvia the 1 bit communication object“Output - Switching”. The same com-munication object also sends a tele-gram if the output modifies its state be-cause e.g. the 4 bit object “Dimmer -Rel. dimming” or the 1 byte object“Dimmer - Brightness value” has recei-ved a telegram. To do so, the transmitflag must however be set.

The brightness value which the switch/dimming actuator uses when it is swit-ched on is defined in the parameters. Aconstant value between 10% bright-ness and 100% brightness can be sel-ected.

With the 4 bit communication object“Dimmer - Rel. dimming”, the connec-ted luminaires can be dimmed in ac-cordance with EIS 2. If the actuator isswitched off, it can be dimmed on viathe 4 bit object.

With the 1 byte communication object“Dimmer - Brightness value”, one of256 brightness values in the range of 0= switched off to 256 = full brightnesscan be assigned to the connected lu-minaires. The object can also send themodified brightness value to other dim-mers. To do so, the transmit flag mustbe set. The setting “internal and exter-nal dimmer” sets the transmit flag auto-matically.

The time which a connected luminaireneeds to be dimmed from minimum tomaximum brightness is called the dim-ming speed. The dimming speed usedby the actuator to dim the connectedluminaires is defined via the corre-sponding setting on the “Dimmer” pa-rameter page. The minimum setting forthe dimming speed is “2 s” while themaximum is “3 min”.

Note:When the constant lighting control isactive, the dimming speed must beshorter than the speed of the controlloop as otherwise the constant lightingcontrol would already send a newbrightness value although the luminai-re has still not been dimmed to its cur-rent brightness value due to the highdimming speed.

Constant light

The constant lighting control can referto one or several dimming actuators.The current brightness value is sentvia the communication object “Dimmer- Brightness value”. It must be ensuredthat the dimming actuators which areused in this case have entered a com-mon group address at their brightnessobject.

The constant lighting control can beactivated or deactivated at any time viathe EIB. The object “Constant bright-ness controller - Activation” is used forthis purpose. If a telegram with the va-lue “1” is received at this object, theconstant lighting control is switched on.It is switched off if a telegram with thevalue “0” is sent to the object.

If the constant lighting control shouldfor example be switched on directly ondetection of movement, the objects“Movement - Telegr. switch” and “Con-stant brightness controller - Activation”must be linked together via a commongroup address.

If an OFF telegram is sent to the 1 bitobject “Output - Switching”, the con-stant lighting control is deactivated. Nofurther telegrams are sent via the ob-ject “Brightness value”.

If an ON telegram is sent to the 1 bitobject “Output - Switching”, the con-

2 - 36 April 2007


stant lighting control is activated. Theparameterised initial brightness valueis sent first. The constant lighting con-trol then starts and regulates via the“Brightness value” object the actuatorsthat are linked with a group address.

The time which the controller needs topass through the complete dimmingrange is defined with the parameter“Speed of control loop”. It is morepleasant for the human eye if thebrightness level remains as constantas possible. Rapid changes in thebrightness level are disruptive.

In addition to the speed of the controlloop, there is the “Dimming step size ofthe control”. A slow control setting ispreset which means that the constantlighting control always increases or re-duces the brightness value by plus/mi-nus two.

Example:The actual brightness value is 104 butthe room brightness is too dark. Thepresence detector sends a telegramwith the value “106” to its communicati-on object “Dimmer - Brightness value”.If it determines via its light sensor thatthe room lighting is sufficient, no furt-her telegrams are sent. If it is still toodark, a telegram with the value “108” issent. This process is repeated until therequired brightness level is reached. Abrightness value that is too high is dim-med down using the same process butin the opposite direction.

The “Dimming step size of the control”can also be be set to “-2/+16 (fast con-trol at dimming up)”. In this setting, thepresence detector always increasesthe brightness value by +16 if it esta-blishes that there is insufficient light inthe room. If the required brightness va-lue is dimmed too far, the presence de-tector continues to send telegrams withsmaller brightness values and thusdims down again.

The “fast control“ is particularly a goodidea if the room is protected againststrong sunlight by blinds. In the setting“slow control”, the constant lightingcontrol could supply the room with in-sufficient brightness due to the blindbeing lowered. It would become toodark temporarily and the period untilthe constant brightness controllercould adjust the brightness level ac-cordingly would be too long.

Normally, the constant lighting controlswitches off the connected dimmingactuators when the brightness valuereaches the value “0”. This means thatthe brightness level in the room is suf-ficient and the connected luminairesdo not need to remain switched on atthe minimum brightness.

For some electronic ballasts, which al-ways switch on at maximum brightnessand are only then dimmed down, it isadvisable to change the setting. Theparameter “Constant brightness con-troller minimum” is used for this purpo-se. In the setting “1”, the presence de-tector is no longer switched off butremains at its minimum brightness va-lue while it still detects movement. If itnow becomes dark again, the electro-nic ballasts would dim up as normalwithout briefly indicating maximumbrightness.

It is possible to select via the ETS pro-gram the value at which the constant li-ghting control should be set. The set-point for the constant lighting control isentered directly. This can be a bright-ness value between 5 and 1000 lux. Itis however better to allow the user toenter the required brightness value di-rectly. The communication object “Con-stant brightness controller - Save act.brightness value” is available for thispurpose. As soon as a telegram withthe value “1” is received at this object,the presence detector adopts the cur-rent brightness value as the new set-point value for the constant lightingcontrol. The controller must then be re-started. This can either be carried outvia the object “Output - Switching” orwith an ON telegram or following de-tection of movement once the previousrecovery time has elapsed.

A new setpoint can be assigned at anytime via the 1 byte communication ob-ject “Constant brightness controller -Brightness setpoint/act. value” (see ex-ample).

If the user leaves the room, thepresence detector starts the recoverytime which is set on the tab “Adjust-ments channel 1”. If the user hashowever previously adapted thebrightness value to his requirementsvia the dimming objects, the presencedetector starts the recovery time of theinactive constant lighting control oncethe normal recovery time has elapsed.This means that if someone should

April 2007 2 - 37


Additional communication objectsfor switch/dimming actuator FM.


6 1 bit Output Switching7 4 bit Dimmer Rel. dimming8 1 byte Dimmer Brightness value9 1 bit Const. brightn. controller Activation

10 1 bit Const. brightn. controller Save act. brightness value11 1 byte Const. brightn. controller Brightness setpoint/act. value

enter the room during this period, thepresence detector/bus coupler combi-nation will not start the constant li-ghting control again but the object“Dimmer - Brightness value” will sendits last active brightness value.

The presence detector can switch onthe constant lighting control mode di-rectly after bus voltage recovery or bedisabled. A corresponding setting isavailable on the “General” tab.

The current “Brightness setpoint/actualvalue” is not stored in the event of abus voltage failure. If a specific bright-ness value should be set after busvoltage recovery, it should be sentagain to the object “Constant bright-ness controller - Brightness setpoint/act. value”.

Example:Constant lighting control should beused on a tennis court to save energy.A brightness level of 200 lux should beused during leisure mode while a va-lue of 500 lux should be used duringcompetition mode.

The presence detector on a flush-mounted bus coupler, a built-in switch/dimming actuator and a 1-fold switchsensor (application “Value”) are usedfor toggling between the two constantlighting modes.

Care should be taken that the samegroup addresses are entered in thecommunication objects for dimming inboth the presence detector and theswitch/dimming actuator.

The presence detector must be instal-led in an appropriate position and putinto operation. After commissioning,the illuminance must be determinedwith a measuring device. The currentbrightness value of the actuator can bemodified via the dimming objects until

an illuminance of 200 lx is achieved.This adjustment should take place intest mode. The corresponding parame-ter must be set to “test mode” for thisperiod.

After each switching or dimming pro-cess, the presence detector sends thecurrent actual brightness value via theobject “Constant brightness controller -Brightness setpoint/act. value”. Thetransmit flag must be set by default.

The actual value that is sent can be re-corded with the help of the telegramrecording function in ETS. The recor-ded value can now be entered in theparameters of the 1-fold switch sensorwith the application “Value”.

The dimming actuator is then dimmedup to 500 lx. The presence detectorthen sends the current setpoint/actualvalue again automatically. The valuethat is now recorded can likewise beentered in the parameters of the 1-foldswitch sensor, in the same way as thevalue for 200 lx.

When selecting the application of theswitch sensor, it should be noted thatthe communication objects of the rok-kers can send 1 byte values.

Then put the switch sensor into opera-tion and the constant lighting controlwith toggling between two operatingmodes is implemented.

2 - 38 April 2007


Additional parameters for constant li-ghting control and dimmer output. Thedefault setting for the values is printedin bold type





– Behaviour on bus voltage recovery:(comm. objects)

– Movement disabled(Illumination channell 1) enabled

– Movement disabled(HVAC channel 2) enabledOnly if activation object for monitoringfunction is available:– Monitoring function disabled

enabledOnly if activation object for constantbrightness controller is available– Constant brightness controller disabled

enabled

Constant brightness controller:– Type of dimming actuator internal dimmer

internal and external dimmer– Activation object constant brightness not available

control availableOnly if activation object is available:– Enabling constant brightness ON telegram

control at OFF telegram– Switch ON brightness 10 % / 20 % / … / 50% / … / 100%– Constant brightness controller 0 (OFF)

minimum 1– Dimming step size of the control -2 / +2 (slow control)

-2 / +16 (fast control at dimmingup)

– Speed of control loop test mode (2.5 min)fast (4 min)normal (10 min)slow (19 min)

– Setpoint brightness control 20(5 lux … 1000 lux)

– Time base of recovery time 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s /9 min

– Time factor of recovery time 100

Dimmer:– The dimming speed has to be slower

than the speed of the control loop.– Dimming speed 2 s / 3.5 s / 5.5 s / 7 s / 10 s / 15 s /

20 s / 45 s / 1 min / 2 min / 3 min


USB/S 1.1USB/S 1.1

22

Page 1 of 4USBS_11_TD_EN_V1-02CDC 502 031 D0201

USB Interface, 2-fold, MDRCUSB/S 1.1, 2CDG 110 008 R0011

Technical Data

Operating voltage – ABB i-bus® EIB / KNX typically 30 V DC (21 ... 32 V DC)– Max. power consumption from the

ABB i-bus® EIB / KNX 12 mA at 20 V– Max. leakage loss of the

ABB i-bus® EIB / KNX 240 mW– USB voltage 5 V DC– Max. power consumption from the USB 60 mA– Max. leakage loss of the USB 300 mW– Max. total leakage loss

(ABB i-bus® EIB / KNX and USB) 540 mWInterface – USB USB standard 1.1Operating and display elements – Programming LED for assignment of the phys. address

– Programming button for assignment of the phys. addressConnections – ABB i-bus® EIB / KNX via bus connecting terminal,

screwless– USB via USB socket type B,

max. cable length 5m (standard)Temperature range – Operation 0 °C ... + 45 °C

– Storage – 25 °C ... + 55 °C– Transport – 25 °C ... + 70 °C

Type of protection – IP 20 DIN EN 60 529Protection class – Class IICE norm – in accordance with EMC and low voltage guidelinesCertification – EIB / KNX CertificateInstallation – on 35 mm mounting rail DIN EN 60 715Dimensions – 90 x 36 x 64.5 (H x W x D)Mounting depth – 64.5 mmWidth in modules – 2 2 modules at 18 mmWeight – 0.09 kgHousing – PlasticHousing colour – greyModel – Modular installation deviceDevice type – Modular DIN rail mounted device MDRCDesign – System pro M

2CD

C 0

71 1

95 F

0004

The USB interface USB/S 1.1 enablescommunication between the PC andthe EIB installation. The data transferis indicated by the EIB LED and theUSB LED.The USB interface can be used fromETS 3 V1.0 onwards.

The USB interface is simply connectedto the ABB i-bus® and then connectedto the USB. The USB interface is auto-matically detected under the PC ope-rating system and installed.

The ABB i-bus® connection is carriedout at the front of the device via thebus connecting terminal supplied.The connection to the USB is likewisecarried out at the front of the device.


USB/S 1.1USB/S 1.1

2 2




USB Interface /1 0 0 0

Circuit diagram

1 Label carrier 5 EIB LED2 Programming button 6 USB LED3 Programming LED 7 USB socket4 Bus connecting terminal

Dimension drawing

2CD

C 0

72 0

33 F

0004

2CD

C 0

72 0

35 F

0004


USB/S 1.1USB/S 1.1

22



USB Interface /1

Selection in ETS2

– ABBCommunication

USB

��

��

Commissioning requirements

The USB interface USB/S 1.1functions under the following operatingsystems: Microsoft Windows 98, NT,2000, ME, XP-Professional and XP-Home.

With Microsoft Windows 98, it shouldbe noted when the USB interface isconnected that the file HIDDEV.INFmust be installed in the directory Win-dows/INF with the hardware assistantof Microsoft Windows.

The interface is fully functional on anactive hub with an external power sup-ply. It does not function on a passivehub without an external power supplyas the device is supplied both from theUSB and the ABB i-bus®.

After booting up the PC and startingthe ETS 3 program, the USB interfaceis first connected to the ABB i-bus®

and then to the USB.

Application description

No application program is required forthe operation of the USB/S 1.1.For documentation purposes, ETS 3contains a dummy application. Thisapplication can be imported as usualin ETS 3. A note appears on the firstparameter page stating that it is only adummy application.There are no parameters or communi-cation objects.The physical address can be set bothlocally and via the ABB i-bus®.

Display

The EIB LED lights up as soon as theABB i-bus® device is connected andready for operation. It flashes as soonas telegram traffic takes place on theABB i-bus®.

The USB LED lights up as soon as theABB i-bus® and USB device are con-nected and ready for operation.It flashes as soon as telegram traffictakes place between the USB andABB i-bus®.


USB/S 1.1USB/S 1.1

2 2



Documents

ABB-EIB Manual Literature